Peerless Industries KX-TDA200 IP Phone User Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
Feature Guide
KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30
Model
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, Hybrid IP-PBX.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Version 1.1
Introduction
About this Feature Guide
This Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall feature reference for the Panasonic
Hybrid IP-PBX.
It explains what this PBX can do, and how to obtain the most out of its many features and facilities.
This manual contains the following sections:
Section 1, Call Handling Features
Provides details about the call handling features.
Section 2, System Configuration and Administration Features
Provides details about the system configuration and administration features.
Section 3, Programming
Provides system programming instructions.
Section 4, Appendix
Provides tables listing capacity of system resources, and tones and ring tones. It also provides the list of abbreviations.
Index
Provide feature titles, important words to help you access the required information easily.
Terms used in this Feature Guide
Installation Manual References
The required installation instruction titles described in the Installation Manual are noted for your reference.
Feature Guide References
The related feature titles described in this Feature Guide are noted for your reference.
User Manual References
The operation required to implement the feature described in the User Manual is noted for your reference.
Abbreviations
There are many abbreviations used in this manual (e.g., "PT" which stands for proprietary telephone). Please refer to the list in this manual (
4.3 List of Abbreviations) for the meaning
of each abbreviation.
About the other manuals
Along with this Feature Guide, the following manuals are available to help you install, and use this PBX:
2 Feature Guide
Installation Manual
Provides instructions for installing the hardware and maintenance of the PBX.
User Manual
Provides operating instructions for end users using PTs, SLTs, PSs, or DSS Consoles.
Changed from:
The KX-TDA30E, the KX-TDA30NE, the KX-TDA30GR, and the
KX-TDA30CE are designed to interwork with the:
The KX-TDA15E/KX-TDA30E, the KX-TDA15NE/KX-TDA30NE, the KX-TDA15GR/KX-
TDA30GR, and the KX-TDA30CE are designed to interwork with the:
Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of a European country
Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access
The KX-TDA100E/KX-TDA200E, the KX-TDA100NE/KX-TDA200NE, the KX-TDA100GR/
KX-TDA200GR, and the KX-TDA100CE/KX-TDA200CE are designed to interwork with the:
Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of a European country
Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access
Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate access
ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)
We, Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd., declare that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
If you would like to receive a copy of the original Declaration of Conformity of our products which relates to the R&TTE, please visit our web address:
http://doc.panasonic.de
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Notes
• There are some optional service cards, PTs, and features which are not available in some areas. Additionally, there are some optional service cards and features for the
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 which are not available for the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30, or vice versa. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
• Displays are described in English as samples.
• While all system programming can be performed through PC programming (
PC Programming), PT programming can only cover a subset (
Programming). In Section 1 Call Handling Features and Section 2 System
Configuration and Administration Features, programming references such as "
Date & Time [000]" indicate that system programming can be done by PT
programming.
Feature Guide 3
For further details, please refer to the on-line help of the Maintenance Console (
3.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console).
Feature Highlights
Networking Features
This PBX supports the following networking features:
TIE Line Service
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations.
(
Virtual Private Network (VPN)
VPN is a service provided by the telephone company. It uses an existing line as if it were a private line. (
1.28.2 Virtual Private Network (VPN))
QSIG Network
QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN (Q.931) and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network. (
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals are converted into IP packets and sent through this network. (
Built-in Small Call Centre Features
An incoming call distribution group (
1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features) can
be used as a small call centre with the following features:
Queuing Feature
When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, additional incoming calls can wait in a queue. While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table, which can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). (
Log-in/Log-out
Incoming call distribution group members can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the groups manually. While logged-in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call (Wrap-up). (
VIP Call
It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order. (
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features
Connecting a personal computer (PC) to this PBX (via a DPT, or via a Server PC on a LAN) enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in the PC or in the Server PC. (
1.29.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI))
Voice Mail Features
This PBX supports Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration as well as DPT
(Digital) Integration. (
4 Feature Guide
Parallelled Telephone Features
By connecting telephones in parallel, you can increase the number of telephones connected to the PBX without adding additional extension cards. (
Parallel Mode
An SLT can be connected to an APT or DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid port of the PBX. The SLT shares the same extension number with the APT or DPT.
EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode
An SLT can be connected to a DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid port of the PBX.
Unlike parallel mode, XDP mode allows each telephone to act as an independent extension with its own extension number.
Digital XDP
A DPT can be connected to another DPT which is connected to a DPT port or a Super
Hybrid port of the PBX. Similar to XDP mode, each DPT acts as an independent extension with its own extension number.
Portable Station (PS) Features
PSs (e.g., KX-TD7590, KX-TD7690) can be connected to this PBX. It is possible to use the
PBX features using the PS like a PT. A PS can also be used in parallel with a wired telephone
(Wireless XDP Parallel Mode). In this case, the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone. (
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features)
PC Phone/PC Console Features
This PBX supports PC Phone and PC Console. These Panasonic CTI applications provide advanced features.
Feature Guide 5
Table of Contents
1
Call Handling Features ................................................................. 15
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.1.1
1.1.1.2
1.1.1.3
1.1.1.4
1.1.1.5
1.1.1.6
1.1.1.7
1.1.2
1.1.2.1
1.1.2.2
1.1.3
1.1.3.1
1.1.3.2
1.1.3.3
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.2.1
1.2.2.2
1.2.2.3
1.2.2.4
1.2.2.5
1.2.2.6
1.2.2.7
1.3
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features ................................... 58
1.3.1
1.3.1.1
1.3.1.2
1.3.1.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.1.1
1.4.1.2
1.4.1.3
1.4.1.4
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.4.1
1.5.4.2
1.5.4.3
1.5.4.4
1.5.4.5
1.5.4.6
1.5.4.7
1.5.4.8
1.5.5
1.5.5.1
6 Feature Guide
1.5.5.2
1.5.5.3
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.1.1
1.6.1.2
1.6.1.3
1.6.1.4
1.6.1.5
1.6.1.6
1.6.1.7
1.7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.7.4.1
1.7.4.2
1.7.4.3
1.7.4.4
1.8
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features ....................................102
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
1.8.6
1.9
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features .....................................................113
1.9.1
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.10.4
1.10.5
1.10.6
1.10.7
1.10.8
1.10.9
1.11
1.11.1
1.12
1.12.1
1.12.2
1.12.3
1.12.4
1.13
1.13.1
1.13.1.1
1.13.1.2
1.13.1.3
1.14
Feature Guide 7
1.14.1
1.15
Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) ................ 143
1.15.1
Broadcasting (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) .................................... 143
1.16
1.16.1
1.16.2
1.16.3
1.16.4
1.16.5
1.16.6
1.17
1.17.1
1.17.2
1.18
1.18.1
1.18.2
1.19
1.19.1
1.19.2
1.19.3
1.19.4
1.20
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features ....................... 182
1.20.1
1.20.1.1
1.20.1.2
1.20.1.3
1.20.1.4
1.20.1.5
1.20.1.6
1.20.1.7
1.20.1.8
1.20.1.9
1.21
E1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) ............................... 201
1.21.1
E1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) .................................................. 201
1.22
T1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) ............................... 203
1.22.1
T1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) .................................................. 203
1.23
1.23.1
1.23.2
1.23.3
1.24
1.24.1
1.24.2
1.24.3
1.24.4
1.24.5
1.25
Administrative Information Output Features ................................................... 230
1.25.1
1.25.2
8 Feature Guide
1.26
1.26.1
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)...................................................239
1.26.2
1.26.3
1.26.4
1.26.5
1.27
1.27.1
1.27.2
1.28
1.28.1
1.28.2
1.28.3
1.28.3.1
1.28.3.2
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
1.28.3.3
1.28.3.4
1.28.3.5
1.28.4
1.29
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features..............................................278
1.29.1
2
System Configuration and Administration Features............... 281
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.4
2.4.1
Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) ......................312
2.4.2
2.4.3
3
Programming Instructions ......................................................... 317
3.1
3.1.1
3.2
3.2.1
Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console..................................................319
3.3
Feature Guide 9
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
10 Feature Guide
3.3.7
3.3.8
Feature Guide 11
3.3.9
Music Source Selection for BGM (with the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30)/BGM2 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-
3.3.10
3.3.11
4
Appendix ...................................................................................... 361
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.2.1
12 Feature Guide
4.3
4.3.1
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
Feature Guide 13
14 Feature Guide
Section 1
Call Handling Features
Feature Guide 15
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1
Incoming Call Features
1.1.1
Incoming Trunk Call Features
1.1.1.1
Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
Description
Incoming calls via a trunk (public line) are distributed to their destination using a suitable distribution feature.
1.
Available Networking Type for Each Optional Trunk Card Type
Each trunk port of an optional trunk card can be assigned its networking type: Public,
Private, or VPN (Virtual Private Network).
Trunk
Card
Type
LCOT
DID
Networking
Type
Channel Type
Public
(DIL/DID/
DDI/MSN)
T1
E1
LCOT
GCOT
DID
TIE (E & M)
OPX (EXTN.)
DR2
E & M-C
E & M-P
E&M
BRI/PRI
CO
Extension
QSIG-Master
QSIG-Slave
IP-GW
Note:
*
: Enable (default), : Enable
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*1 :
*2 :
1.28.2 Virtual Private Network (VPN)
Private
(TIE)*
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Virtual Private
Network
(VPN)*
2
16 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
2.
Distribution Feature
One of the following features can be assigned to each trunk port:
Feature
Direct In Line
(DIL)
Direct Inward
Dialling (DID)
Multiple
Subscriber
Number (MSN)
Ringing Service
Description
Directs a call to a preprogrammed single destination (e.g., Operator).
Details in
Directs a call with a DID number from a DID line to a preprogrammed destination.
DID is also known as Direct Dialling In (DDI).
Directs a call with an MSN from an ISDN line to a preprogrammed destination.
3.
Destination Change with the Caller’s Identification Number
The Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution feature works in conjunction with the DIL/
DID/DDI/MSN features.
Feature Description Details in
Calling Line
Identification
(CLI) Distribution
Directs a call to a CLI destination if the caller’s identification number has been assigned to the
Caller ID Table.
4.
Available Distribution Feature for Each Optional Trunk Card Type
Trunk
Card
Feature
Type
Channel Type
LCOT
DID
LCOT
T1
E1
GCOT
DID
TIE (E & M)
DR2
E & M-C
E & M-P
E&M
BRI
PRI
CO
CO
DIL
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Note:
*
: Enable (default), : Enable
DID/DDI
*
*
*
*
*
MSN
Feature Guide 17
1.1 Incoming Call Features
5.
Available Destination
Destination
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)
PS
Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +
Phone no.
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)
Availability
6.
Intercept Routing
After distribution, the following features may be required.
Feature Description Details in
Intercept
Routing
No Answer
(IRNA)
If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period (Intercept time), it is redirected to the preprogrammed destination.
Busy/DND
If a called party is busy or in DND mode, the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination.
No
Destination
If a destination is not assigned, the call is redirected to the operator.
18 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.1.2
Direct In Line (DIL)
Description
Provides automatic direction of an incoming trunk call to a preprogrammed destination. Each trunk has a destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
[Method Flowchart]
A trunk call is received.
Does the call have its CLI* information and is CLI mode enabled for the trunk and the time mode?
Yes
CLI works.
No
Yes
Is the CLI destination assigned?
No
Is the DIL destination of the time mode assigned?
Yes
The call is routed to the
DIL destination.
No
The call is routed to the
CLI destination.
The call is routed to the operator (Intercept Routing
—No Destination).
*: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution:
If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller's identification number is assigned in the Caller ID
Table, the call will not be routed to the DIL destination, but routed to the CLI destination.
Feature Guide 19
1.1 Incoming Call Features
[Programming Example of DIL Table]
The table can be programmed for each trunk.
Trunk No.
01
02
:
Day Lunch
CLI
Break Night Day
Enable Disable Enable Disable 101
Enable Disable Disable Disable 102
: : : : :
Destination
*
Lunch Break Night
100
100
:
101
102
:
100
100
:
*
:
Note
Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the DIL table. Tenant number is used to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for the corresponding trunk. VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration (
Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration).
Explanation:
If a trunk call is received from trunk 01;
In Day mode: CLI is enabled. Route to CLI destination.
In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to DIL destination, extension 100.
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
20 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.1.3
Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Description
Provides automatic direction of an incoming call with a DID/DDI number to a preprogrammed destination. Each DID/DDI number has a destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night).
[Method Flowchart]
A trunk call is received.
Is the DID/DDI number found in the DID/DDI table?
Yes
Does the call have its CLI* information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode?
Yes
CLI works.
No
The call is routed to the operator (Intercept
Routing—No Destination).
No
Yes
Is the CLI destination assigned?
No
Is the DID/DDI destination for the time mode assigned?
Yes
The call is routed to the
DID/DDI destination.
No
The call is routed to the
CLI destination.
The call is routed to the operator (Intercept
Routing—No Destination).
*: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution:
If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller's identification number is assigned in the Caller ID
Table, the call will not be routed to the DID/DDI destination, but routed to the CLI destination.
Feature Guide 21
1.1 Incoming Call Features
[Programming Example of DID/DDI Table]
DDI can be programmed as DID.
Locat ion
DID/DDI
No.
*1
DID/DDI
Name
*2
CLI DID/DDI Destination
*3
Day Lunch Break Night Day Lunch Break Night
0001 123-4567 John White
Enabl e
Disabl e
Enabl e
Disabl e
105 100
0002 123-2468 Tom Smith
Enabl e
Disabl e
Disabl e
Disabl e
102 100
0003 123-456 A company
Enabl e
Disabl e
Disabl e
Disabl e
101 101
: : : : : : : : :
105
102
101
:
100
100
100
:
*1
:
*2
:
*3
:
Note
Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the DID/DDI table.
Tenant number is used to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for the corresponding DID/DDI number. VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT
(Digital) Integration (
1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration).
Explanation:
If the DID/DDI number is "123-4567":
1. Checks the number in the table.
Matches the number in location 0001.
2. Checks the time mode.
In Day mode: CLI is enabled. Route to CLI destination.
In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to DID/DDI destination, extension 100.
Conditions
• To use this feature, the DID/DDI service must be assigned for a trunk port as the distribution method (
BRI DIL/DDI/MSN Selection [421] *For BRI only).
•
DID/DDI Number Modification
It is possible to modify a received DID/DDI number, which may be convenient when programming the DID/DDI table. Modification method (removed number of digits/added number) can be programmed on a trunk port basis.
[Modification Example]
Removed number of digits: 6
Added number: 10
Modified DID/DDI number: 876543 21 = 1021
Received DID/DDI number: 87654321
1) Remove the
2) Add "10".
first 6 digits.
22 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
•
The Inter-digit Time
When the Inter-digit time expires, the PBX stops receiving DID/DDI number and starts to check the DID/DDI table. (Refer to the [Programming Example of DID/DDI Table] above).
Even if the Inter-digit time does not expire, the PBX stops receiving the DID/DDI number when the received number is found in the DID/DDI table. The PBX then routes the call to the corresponding destination. If the received number matches several DID/DDI numbers in the table, the DID/DDI number of the lowest numbered location has priority.
[Example] If a call is received in Lunch mode;
Destination Explanation Received
Number
123-4567 Extn. 100
123-456 Extn. 101
The PBX finds the match in location 0001 in the table after receiving "7". So the call is routed to extension 100.
The Inter-digit time expired after receiving "6". The PBX finds the match in location 0003 in the table. So the call is routed to extension 101.
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
Feature Guide 23
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.1.4
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
Description
Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line call with an
MSN to a preprogrammed destination. One ISDN-BRI port can support a maximum of 10
MSNs. Each MSN has a destination for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Point-to-multipoint must be selected for the ISDN configuration (
[Method Flowchart]
A trunk call is received.
Are any MSNs assigned in the MSN table?
Yes
Is the MSN found in the
MSN table?
Yes
Does the call have its CLI* information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode?
Yes
CLI works.
No
The call is routed to the operator (Intercept
Routing—No Destination).
No
The call is ignored.
No
Yes
Is the CLI destination assigned?
No
Is the MSN destination for the time mode assigned?
No
Yes
The call is routed to the
CLI destination.
The call is routed to the
MSN destination.
The call is routed to the operator (Intercept
Routing—No Destination).
*: Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution:
If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller's identification number is assigned in the Caller ID
Table, the call will not be routed to the MSN destination, but routed to the CLI destination.
24 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
[Programming Example of MSN Table for ISDN BRI Port 1]
A table can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port. Each BRI port has 10 MSN locations.
Locat ion
MSN
01
02
:
10
123-
4567
123-
2468
:
:
MSN
Name
A
Company
C
Company
:
:
CLI MSN Destination
Day Lunch Break Night Day Lunch Break Night
Enable
Disabl e
Enable
Disabl e
Enable
:
:
Disabl e
:
:
Disabl e
:
:
Disabl e
:
:
101
102
:
:
100
100
:
:
101
102
:
:
100
100
:
:
Note
Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the MSN table.
Tenant number is used to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for the corresponding MSN. VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration (
1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration).
Explanation:
If the MSN "123-4567" is received from BRI port 1:
1. Checks the number in the table.
Matches the number in location 01.
2. Checks the time mode.
In Day mode: CLI is enabled. Route to CLI destination.
In Lunch mode: CLI is disabled. Route to MSN destination, extension 100.
Conditions
• To use this feature, the MSN service must be assigned for a trunk port as the distribution method (
BRI DIL/DDI/MSN Selection [421]).
•
MSN Modification
It is possible to modify a received MSN to make it shorter, which may be convenient when programming the MSN table. Modification method (removed number of digits/added number) can be programmed on a trunk port basis.
[Modification Example]
Removed number of digits: 6
Added number: 10
Received MSN: 87654321
Modified MSN: 876543 21 = 1021
1) Remove the first
6 digits.
2) Add "10".
• When using point-to-multipoint configuration with a BRI, do not connect another ISDN terminal device in parallel with the PBX. As only two channels can be used at one time with the BRI, the other ISDN terminal device may monopolise both channels.
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
Feature Guide 25
1.1 Incoming Call Features
26 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.1.5
Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
Description
Directs an incoming trunk call to a destination when the caller’s identification number (e.g.,
Caller ID) matches the number in the System Speed Dialling Table which is used as the Caller
ID Table. Each Caller ID number (telephone number for each System Speed Dialling number) can have its own destination.
CLI Feature
Caller ID (KX-TDA30/KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
Calling Line Identification
Presentation (CLIP)
Automatic Number
Identification (ANI) (KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
Description Details in
Caller’s number is sent from an analogue trunk.
Caller’s number is sent from an ISDN line. • 1.20.1.2
Caller’s number is sent from an E1 or T1 line.
CLI always works in conjunction with the following call distribution methods:
a)
DIL
b)
DID/DDI
c)
MSN Ringing Service
Each trunk (for DIL) and the DID/DDI/MSN number can enable or disable the CLI feature for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (
When the call has its Caller ID and the CLI is enabled for the time mode, the call will be handled by the CLI method.
[Programming Example of System Speed Dialling Table for CLI]
Location
(System Speed
Dialling No.)
000
001
:
Telephone No.
901234567890
:
:
*1
System Speed
Dialling Name
*2
ABC Company
:
:
CLI Destination
200
:
:
Feature Guide 27
1.1 Incoming Call Features
*1
:
*2
:
System Speed Dialling Number [001]
System Speed Dialling Name [002]
Explanation:
If the caller’s number is "0123-456-7890" (The Trunk Access number is disregarded.):
1. Checks the number in the table.
Matches the number in location 000.
2. The call is routed to the CLI destination, extension 200.
Conditions
•
Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
The Caller ID number is used after modification by the Automatic Caller ID Number
Modification. (
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
28 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.1.6
Intercept Routing
Description
Provides automatic redirection of incoming trunk calls. There are two types of Intercept Routing as follows:
Feature Description
Intercept Routing—No
Answer (IRNA)
If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period (Intercept time) (
redirected to the preprogrammed destination.
Intercept Routing—
Busy/DND
If a called party is busy or in DND mode, the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination.
The available intercept destination is as follows:
Type 1: The destination assigned on the extension port which the original destination joins.
(
Extension Intercept Destination [604])
Type 2: The destination assigned on the trunk group which receives the call.
(
Trunk Group Intercept Destination [470])
Original Destination
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN
Extension/T1-OPX)
PS
Incoming Call Distribution Group
Type 1
The Available Intercept Destination
Type 1
Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call
Distribution Group works (
Feature). The overflow destination is assigned on
the incoming call distribution group which the original destination joins (
Overflow Time Expiration [625]).
Type 2
Type 2
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Type 2
Type 2*
Not available Analogue/ISDN Remote
Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. +
Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no
PBX Code)
Not available
Not available
Not available
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX
Code)
Not available
Feature Guide 29
1.1 Incoming Call Features
*: This is applied only when a trunk call arrives on a DISA line but the line is busy at that time.
Once the call reaches the destination extension by using the DISA feature, the Intercept
Routing feature of the extension works.
Each of them can have different intercept destinations for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night) (
[Available Intercept Destination]
Intercept Destination
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)
PS
Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +
Phone no.
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)
Availability
Conditions
•
Intercept Routing—Busy/DND on/off
Each Intercept Routing—Busy and Intercept Routing—DND can be enabled or disabled through system programming.
If disabled, one of the following is activated depending on the trunk card type which a call arrives through:
a)
LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) Card: The incoming trunk call will ring at the original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone.
b)
Other Trunk Cards: A busy tone will be sent to the caller.
•
If the intercept destination cannot receive the call: a)
Intercept Routing—No Answer: Intercept timer will restart at the original destination, until the call is answered.
b)
Intercept Routing—Busy/DND: The call will be sent back to the original destination when the call arrives through the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card. When the call arrives through other trunk cards the caller will hear a busy tone.
•
Idle Extension Hunting
If an extension is a member of an idle extension hunting group, calls to that extension will not be redirected by Intercept Routing—Busy/DND. If the extension is busy or in DND mode, calls to that extension will be redirected to the next extension in the idle extension hunting group.
30 Feature Guide
Feature Guide References
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.1 Incoming Call Features
Feature Guide 31
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.1.7
Intercept Routing—No Destination
Description
Provides automatic redirection of an incoming trunk call which does not have a destination assigned. The intercept destination is an operator (tenant/PBX) (
*For PBX operator only).
Conditions
•
Intercept Routing—No Destination on/off
The Intercept Routing—No Destination feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming.
If disabled, reorder tone will be sent to the caller. However, the Intercept Routing—No
Destination feature always works for calls through the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card even when disabled.
•
If an operator (tenant/PBX) is not assigned:
The lowest jack numbered extension will be the intercept destination.
• Intercept Routing—No Destination also applies to:
Calls from doorphones.
Feature Guide References
32 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.2
Internal Call Features
1.1.2.1
Internal Call Features—SUMMARY
Description
The following incoming calls reach their destination:
Feature Description Details in
Intercom Call
A call from one extension to another.
Doorphone Call
When a call from a doorphone reaches its destination, the recipient can talk to the visitor.
[Available Destination]
The destinations of doorphone calls can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night) (
2.2.4 Time Service) on a doorphone port basis (
Destination
Calling from
Extension Doorphone
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)
PS
Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +
Phone no.
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)
: Available
Feature Guide 33
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.2.2
Internal Call Block
Description
Internal calls can be restricted on a COS basis. Each COS of the caller can enable or disable this feature for each COS of the called party.
[Programming Example]
Caller
Called Party
COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 ...
COS 1
COS 2
:
COS 3
: : : :
: Block
Explanation:
a) COS 1 can make calls to all extensions.
b) COS 2 can make calls to COS 1 only. (COS 2 cannot make calls to COS 2.)
c) COS 3 can make calls to COS 3 only.
COS 1
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
COS 2 COS 3
Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106
Conditions
• Restricted extension numbers cannot be the parameter of the feature settings (e.g.,
Walking Extension).
• All extensions can make an Operator Call (
2.2.5 Operator Features) regardless of the
Internal Call Block.
34 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
• This feature can also restrict calling a doorphone from an extension on a COS of the extension and a COS of the doorphone port basis. Each doorphone port can be assigned a COS. (
Feature Guide 35
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3
Incoming Call Indication Features
1.1.3.1
Incoming Call Indication Features—SUMMARY
Description
Incoming calls are indicated by various methods as follows:
Type
Ring Tone
Feature
Ring Tone
Pattern
Selection
Voice-calling Alternate
Receiving—
Ring/Voice
LED
(LED: Light
Emitting
Diode)
LED Indication
Description Details in
A telephone rings when receiving a call. The ring tone patterns can be changed for each incoming call type.
A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming.
The light shows line conditions with a variety of light patterns.
Display
(Caller’s
Information)
Display
Information
External Pager Trunk Answer from Any
Station
(TAFAS)
Tone/Voice during a
Conversation
Call Waiting
The display shows the caller’s information.
The external pager sends a ring tone when receiving a call.
A busy extension hears a tone, or voice from the handset/built-in speaker indicating that another incoming call is waiting.
36 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3.2
Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Description
A ring tone pattern can be selected for each incoming call type on a Ring Tone Pattern Table basis, which can be assigned for each extension.
[Ring Tone Patterns]
1 280 ms
Single
Double
Triple
S-Double
[Programming Example of Ring Tone Pattern Table]
There are a specified number of programmable tables each of which allows the assignment of ring tone patterns for the following incoming call types:
For trunk calls (including trunk call hold recalls) and doorphone calls, select ring tone patterns on a trunk group or a doorphone port basis.
Table
No.
Intercom
Call/Hold
Recall
Trunk Call/Hold
Recall
Doorphone Call
TRG1 TRG2 ...
Port 1 Port 2 ...
1
2
:
Double
Single
:
Single
Double
: : :
Single
Double
: : :
Timed
Reminder
Call
Back
LCS
: : :
Each extension can select one of the tables.
Conditions
• "
PT Ring off Setting
" can be enabled or disabled through system programming. If disabled, PT users cannot set the ring off.
Feature Guide 37
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1.3.3
Call Waiting
Description
Used to inform a busy extension that another incoming call is waiting. The busy extension user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold.
The following notification method can be assigned for each extension depending on the call waiting and the telephone type:
a)
Call Waiting Tone: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
b)
OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker
c)
Whisper OHCA: Voice from the handset
d)
Off: No notification.
Intercom Call
Trunk Call*
Call Type
Notification Method
DPT Other Telephone
Call Waiting tone/OHCA/
Whisper OHCA/Off
Call Waiting tone/Off
Call Waiting tone/Off
*: Including a doorphone call, call via an incoming call distribution group, and a transferred trunk call from another extension.
This feature is also known as Busy Station Signalling (BSS).
Conditions
• Call Waiting call for an extension in a VM group (DPT/DTMF) is not available.
•
Data Line Security
Setting Data Line Security cancels the Call Waiting setting. (
•
Call Waiting Tone
A PT user can hear different Call Waiting tones for trunk call and intercom call if "
Tone 2
" has been selected through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection). If
"
Tone 1
" has been selected, the same Call Waiting tone will be heard for both trunk call and intercom call.
All Call Waiting tone patterns have a default (
•
Caller Information
With the Call Waiting tone, the caller’s information flashes on the display for five seconds at 15-second intervals.
•
Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
Besides the Call Waiting service within the PBX, the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from your telephone company informs the extension user of another incoming trunk call that is waiting. He can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold. For details, consult your telephone company.
Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID) (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only):
With the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company, the
Caller ID number can be received and flash on the display twice for five seconds at 15second intervals.
38 Feature Guide
1.1 Incoming Call Features
Feature Guide References
1.7.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting
1.7.3 Receiving Call Waiting (Call Waiting/Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]/Whisper
OHCA)
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Feature Guide 39
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2
Receiving Group Features
1.2.1
Idle Extension Hunting
Description
If a called extension is busy or in DND mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group, which can be programmed through system programming (
Idle Extension Hunting Group Member [681]). Idle
extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type (
Extension Hunting Type [680]).
This feature is also known as Station Hunting.
Type
Circular Hunting
Description
An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group in a circular way.
Incoming call
Extn.
Assigned order
Busy
Extn.
Extn.
Extn.
Terminated Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group until reaching the last assigned extension.
Incoming call
Extn.
Assigned order
Busy
Extn.
Extn.
Extn.
Conditions
• Idle Extension Hunting applies to:
Intercom, trunk, and doorphone calls to a single destination.
• An extension user can belong to only one idle extension hunting group.
40 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
•
If all the searched extensions are busy:
The PBX redirects the call to an overflow destination which can be assigned for each idle extension hunting group and each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (
[Available Destination]
Destination
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)
PS
Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +
Phone no.
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)
Availability
•
FWD/DND Mode
While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension which has set FWD—All Calls or DND feature will be skipped, and the call will go to the next extension in the group.
Feature Guide References
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
Feature Guide 41
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.2
Incoming Call Distribution Group Features
1.2.2.1
Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY
Description
An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions programmed through system programming (
Incoming Call Distribution Group Member [620]). An incoming call
distribution group receives calls directed to the group. Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number.
Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions in the group using a distribution method. When a preprogrammed number of extensions in the group are busy, the incoming calls can wait in a queue.
Each incoming call distribution group and member extensions can be programmed as desired to handle incoming calls. Calls to the group can be monitored by an extension assigned as a supervisor (supervisor extension).
Programming Item Example for Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 with
Diagram
A through F in the table are described in the following diagram.
:
3
A
1
2
Group Floating
No.
Extn. No.
*1
290
291
Group
Name
*2
Sales
Engineering
B C
Distribution
Method
*3
Max. No. of
Busy
Extensions
*4
Ring 3
UCD Max.
D
Queuing
Call
Capacity
*5
E F
Hurry-up Overflow
Level
*6
Time
*7
5
11
3
8
60
90
Overflow Destination
*8
Day
...
...
Night
100
...
...
100
200
...
...
200
1
5
Tenant
No.
*9
*1
:
*2
:
*3
:
*4
:
Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number [622]
Incoming Call Distribution Group Name [623]
Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method [624]
Maximum Number of Agents [632]
*5
:
*6
:
*7
:
*8
:
Destination for Overflow Time Expiration [625]/Destination When All Busy [627]
*9
:
Tenant number is required to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (
2.2.4 Time Service) and the music source (for Music on Hold) for each group.
42 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
Calls arriving at incoming call distribution group 1.
D
Queuing Feature
Five calls are waiting in a queue.
B
Group Call Distribution
Calls are distributed by the assigned method.
(Only three extensions
[agents] can answer the
Supervisor Extension
*
11
Extn.
100
Monitors or controls the incoming call distribution group status.
Extn.
101
Extn.
102
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Extn.
103
F
E
Extn.
104
Overflow Feature
a) Sends a busy tone (Busy on Busy), or b) Redirects to the overflow destination.
Manual Queue Redirection
*
10
The longest waiting call in a queue can be redirected to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry-up button. The button shows the Hurryup status.
Extn.
105
A Incoming Call
Distribution Group 1
(Floating extension no.: 290,
Name: Sales)
Log-in
Extn.
105
Log-out
*
12
*10 :
*11 :
*12 :
1.
Group Call Distribution [
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution]
Incoming calls are distributed using one of the following methods:
Distribution Method
Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD)
Priority Hunting
Ring
Description
Calls go to a different extension uniformly each time a call is received.
An idle extension is searched in the specified order.
All extensions in the incoming call distribution group ring simultaneously.
2.
Queuing Feature [
If a preprogrammed numbers of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, a preprogrammed number of additional calls can wait in a queue.
While calls are waiting in the queue, an outgoing message (OGM) or Music on Hold can be sent to the waiting callers.
3.
VIP Call [
It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups so that an incoming
Feature Guide 43
1.2 Receiving Group Features
call can be received from the groups in priority order.
4.
Overflow Feature [
A call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination when it cannot be answered or queued
(Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group). It is also possible to send a busy tone (Busy on Busy) or disconnect the line.
5.
Incoming Call Distribution Group Controlling Feature
Feature
Log-in/Log-out
Description Details in
Member extensions can join the group to handle calls (Log-in) or leave the group for a break (Log-out).
They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their extensions.
Supervisory
Feature
Incoming
Call Queue
Monitor
The supervisor extension can monitor various information about the incoming calls for each incoming call distribution group on his display.
Log-in/Logout Monitor and Remote
Control
Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor the log-in/log-out status of the group members.
Remote Control: The supervisor extension can change the status of the members.
Conditions
• One extension can belong to multiple incoming call distribution groups.
•
ICD Group button
An Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group button can be assigned on a flexible button for each incoming call distribution group. It receives the incoming calls to the group.
One extension can have more than one ICD Group button of the same or different incoming call distribution groups (Multiple ICD Group). If all ICD Group buttons in the same incoming call distribution group are occupied, the next incoming call will be held in a queue or will overflow. If the ICD Group button is not assigned, incoming calls will arrive at the INTERCOM or CO button.
Even though an extension can have an ICD Group button for an incoming call distribution group that the extension has not been programmed to be included through system programming (
Incoming Call Distribution Group Member [620]), the ICD Group button
will not receive calls to that group.
•
Group FWD
The FWD feature can be assigned on an incoming call distribution group basis.
•
COS for Incoming Call Distribution Groups
Each incoming call distribution group is assigned a COS number. Group FWD to an outside party can be enabled or disabled for each COS. The COS for incoming call distribution groups is also used for the Internal Call Block feature; when an extension user calls an incoming call distribution group, the PBX checks the COS of the calling extension against the COS of the incoming call distribution group (
44 Feature Guide
Feature Guide References
1.2 Receiving Group Features
Feature Guide 45
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.2.2
Group Call Distribution
Description
The Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions using the distribution method until a preprogrammed number of extensions (agents)
(
Maximum Number of Agents [632]) are available to accept a call. When incoming calls
exceed the number, the calls enter a queue (
1.
Distribution Method
There are three distribution methods which can be assigned to each incoming call distribution group (
Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method [624]).
Distribution
Method
Uniform Call
Distribution
(UCD)
Description
Calls go to a different extension uniformly each time a call is received. Extensions are hunted in a circular way in the preprogrammed order for the group, starting at the extension after the extension which received the last call.
Extn.
A
Extn.
B
Extn.
C
Extn.
D
Received the last call.
Starts searching from extn. B. (Skips extn. A.)
Priority Hunting
An idle extension is searched for using the preprogrammed order for the group.
1st Priority 2nd Priority 3rd ....
Extn.
A
Extn.
B
Extn.
C
Extn.
D
Ring
Always starts searching from the first assigned extension.
All extensions in the group ring simultaneously.
Delayed Ringing:
Delayed ringing or no ringing can be programmed for each extension in the group (
Incoming Call Distribution Group
Delayed Ringing [621]). The call can be answered by pressing the
flashing button even if no ring or a delayed time is set.
Extn.
A
Extn.
B
Extn.
C
Extn.
D
Rings immediately simultaneously.
Delayed Ringing:
Rings after a specified time delay.
46 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
2.
Call Waiting for Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group Call Waiting)
When there are no available extensions in an incoming call distribution group, the group members can receive the Call Waiting tone. To use this feature:
• Select the Group Call Waiting mode through system programming. This determines the distribution method for waiting calls.
• Member extensions must assign the Call Waiting mode individually, or they will not be notified. (
[How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates]
Programming Conditions
Group Call
Waiting Mode
Distribution
All
Group Call
Distribution Method
UCD
Priority Hunting
Ring
UCD/Priority Hunting/
Ring
Result
Group Call Waiting
Distribution Method
UCD
Priority Hunting
Not available*
Ring
Capable
Telephone
PT/PS with idle
ICD Group button
Any telephone
*: Incoming calls enter the queue immediately. Member extensions do not receive the
Call Waiting tone.
[Example]
•
•
Group Call Waiting mode: All
Group call distribution method for idle extensions: UCD
All extensions hear the Call
Waiting tone (Ring).
[ICD Group Button for Group Call Waiting]
The way that the Group Call Waiting feature works depends on the Group Call Waiting
Distribution method as follows:
a)
Ring: The Group Call Waiting feature activates for all busy member extensions
(even when the extensions do not have ICD Group buttons) simultaneously for only one incoming call — additional calls will wait in a queue.
b)
UCD/Priority Hunting: The Group Call Waiting feature activates on an idle ICD
Group button located on busy member extensions in a certain order. (This order depends on the type: UCD or Priority Hunting.) Calls will arrive at idle buttons until all ICD Group buttons are occupied — additional calls will wait in a queue.
Note
In the method b), if an extension has one or more ICD Group buttons for an incoming call distribution group and all the ICD Group buttons on the extension are occupied, the Group Call Waiting feature for the group will not work at the extension.
Feature Guide 47
1.2 Receiving Group Features
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group 1
(Floating extension no.: 200)
3
2
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group 2
(Floating extension no.: 300)
1
ICD Group 200 (Call Waiting)
ICD Group 200 (Call Waiting)
ICD Group 300 (Answering the Call)
3.
No Reply Redirection (UCD or Priority Hunting Method)
If a call received at a member extension is not answered within a preprogrammed time period (No Answer time), the call will be redirected to the next member extension. If there is no idle group member, the call queues at target extension until a group member becomes available.
Conditions
•
FWD/DND Extension
System programming for each incoming call distribution group is required to skip or ring the extension which has FWD or DND feature set. If it rings, the FWD/DND settings are ignored. (
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND))
• Group Call Waiting feature cannot be used with the VIP Call feature (
and/or Wrap-up feature (
1.2.2.6 Log-in/Log-out). Because to use the VIP Call feature
and/or Wrap-up feature, Call Waiting mode on each extension should be off.
48 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.2.3
Queuing Feature
Description
When a preprogrammed number of extensions (
Maximum Number of Agents [632]) in an
incoming call distribution group are busy, additional incoming calls can wait in a queue. The number of calls which can be in the waiting queue is programmable (
While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table (
Queuing Time Table [630]), which can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night)
(
2.2.4 Time Service). Each Queuing Time Table has a specified number of sequences. The
following procedures are provided to make up a Queuing Time Table:
[Procedure Table]
Command Description Condition
OGM a
An outgoing message (OGM) a
(01–64 [with the KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200] or 01–32 [with the KX-
TDA15/KX-TDA30]) is sent to the caller.
After the outgoing message (OGM),
Music on Hold will be sent and redirects to the next sequence.
b
×
5 s
Puts the caller in the waiting queue for b (01–16)
×
5 seconds.
If an outgoing message (OGM) has not been sent to the caller, the caller hears a ringback tone.
If an outgoing message (OGM) has been sent to the caller, the caller hears
Music on Hold.
Sequence c
Redirects to sequence c (01–16). None
Overflow
Redirects to overflow destination. None
Disconnect
Disconnects the line.
None
None
(No command)
Redirects to the next sequence. If assigned on sequence 01, the
Queuing Time Table will not be activated.
[Programming Example of Queuing Time Table]
Queuing
Time
Table
No.
Sequence
01
Sequence
Sequence
02
Sequence
03
*1
Sequence
04
01 OGM 01 6
×
5 s OGM 03 Overflow
02
03
: : : : :
...
Sequence
16
*2
: :
*1
:
Sequences in Queuing Time Table [631]
*2
:
The call will be disconnected if the destination is not determined after sequence 16.
Feature Guide 49
1.2 Receiving Group Features
Explanation for Queuing Time Table 01:
The call queues.
Sequence 01
OGM 01 is sent.
Thank you for calling Panasonic.
The department you are calling is busy.
Please hold the line.
We will answer your call shortly.
Queuing Time Table 01
Sequence 02
Music on Hold is sent for 30 seconds.
Sequence 03
OGM 03 is sent.
We are sorry to keep you holding.
The department is still busy. We are transferring you to the operator.
Sequence 04
Redirects to the overflow destination.
Overflow destination answers.
The call is connected to the member extension as soon as the extension becomes available.
Conditions
•
If the call is transferred to the incoming call distribution group and is handled by the
Queuing Time Table:
Transfer Recall will not occur even if the Transfer Recall time expires.
•
Manual Queue Redirection
It is possible to redirect the longest waiting call in a queue to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry-up button. (When the call is already ringing on any extension, the call is not redirected.)
This feature is also known as Hurry-up Transfer.
•
Hurry-up Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Hurry-up button. The number of calls queuing before Manual Queue Redirection may be performed is programmable (
Queuing Hurryup Level [629]). The button shows the current status as follows:
Off
Light Pattern
Red on
Calls in the Waiting Queue
No queued call
At or under the assigned number for Hurry-up
Rapid red flashing Over the assigned number for Hurry-up
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.8.3 Forwarding a Waiting Call (Manual Queue Redirection)
50 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.2.4
VIP Call
Description
It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order.
Each incoming call distribution group can enable or disable the VIP Call mode. When multiple groups enable the VIP Call mode, the incoming call distribution group with the lowest numbered group has the highest priority. When multiple groups disable the VIP Call mode, queuing calls are distributed to extensions uniformly.
[Example]
In the call centre, incoming call distribution groups 1 and 3 enable the VIP Call mode, while incoming call distribution groups 2 and 4 disable the VIP Call mode.
Calls have been distributed by DIL/DID/DDI/CLI.
(The number in the circle is the queuing order.)
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group 1
(for VIP)
6
1
1st
Priority
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group 2
(for general customers)
5
3
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group 3
(for special customers)
3rd
Priority
4
2
2nd
Priority
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group 4
(for general customers)
3rd
Priority
8
7
Extn.
101
Extn.
102
Extn.
103
Distribution order:
1 6 2 4 3 7 5 8
From: Group 1 Group 3 Groups 2 and 4
Feature Guide 51
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.2.5
Overflow Feature
Description
When waiting calls exceed the waiting queue capacity (
Queuing Call Capacity [628]), they
may be redirected to a preprogrammed destination or a busy tone may be sent to the callers by the following features:
1) Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group
2) Busy on Busy
1.
Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group
The Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works in one of following conditions:
a)
There is no space in the waiting queue.
b)
The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged-in.
c)
An Overflow command is assigned to the Queuing Time Table.
d)
The Overflow time (
e)
Manual Queue Redirection is performed.
[Available Destination]
The overflow destinations can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group and each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (
2.2.4 Time Service). The two different
destinations can be assigned, one for the a) and b) (
Destination When All Busy [627]),
and one for c), d), and e) (
Destination for Overflow Time Expiration [625]).
Availability Destination
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)
PS
Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +
Phone no.
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)
52 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
2.
Busy on Busy
The Busy on Busy feature works when the destination for the Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group feature is not assigned in one of the following conditions:
a)
There is no space in the Waiting queue.
b)
The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged-in.
[Example of a)]
When the answering agent number (
Maximum Number of Agents [632]) is "2", and the
queuing call number (
Queuing Call Capacity [628]) is "0":
There are five assistants in the shop. If two of them are engaged on the phone, the next caller will hear a busy tone to prevent the caller from thinking that there is no one in the shop or that the shop is closed.
Conditions
[Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group]
•
If the Overflow time expires, and the overflow destination is unavailable: a)
If the trunk call arrives through the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card: (1) The line is disconnected when the call was once in a queue and an outgoing message (OGM) was sent to the call, or when the call reached an incoming call distribution group by using the DISA feature (
1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)). (2) Except
for the above, redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again.
b)
If the call arrives through the other cards: Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again.
[Busy on Busy]
• If a trunk call arrives through the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card, a busy tone will not be sent to the caller.
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 53
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.2.6
Log-in/Log-out
Description
Incoming call distribution group members can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the groups manually.
They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their extensions. They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls.
Wrap-up:
While logged-in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call (Wrap-up time). While Wrap-up timer is active, calls to all incoming call distribution groups to which the extension belongs will skip the extension so that he can make some report or etc.
Wrap-up mode can also be activated manually (Not Ready) by pressing the Wrap-up button.
[Log-in/Log-out and Wrap-up Status Example]
<When the incoming call distribution group is in Priority Hunting distribution method>
Incoming call
Log-in
Ready
Waiting for a call
Extn.
101
Ready
Extn.
102
Extn.
103
Extn.
104
Extn.
105
Extn.
106
Ready Not Ready Wrap-up Ready
Answering a call
Press the
Wrap-up button.
The Wrap-up time expires.
Not Ready
Making a report/ temporary break
After completing the call
Press the
Wrap-up button.
Wrap-up
Making a report
Extn.
102
Log-out
Conditions
• It is programmable whether the last remaining logged-in extension can log out.
•
Log-in/Log-out Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Log-in/Log-out button with the following parameters:
Parameter
No parameter
Usage
Used with an ICD Group button, or with a floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group, or with (All).
—
Light Pattern
Red on Off
—
54 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
Parameter Usage
Light Pattern
Red on Off
Floating extension number of a specified incoming call distribution group
Used to log-in or log-out from the specified incoming call distribution group.
Log-out
Status
(All)
Log-in
Status
Used to log-in or log-out from all incoming call distribution groups to which you belong.
After Logout
Operation
After Login
Operation
• If an ICD Group button is assigned, it also shows the log-in/log-out status of the corresponding group. The light pattern is the same as the Log-in/Log-out button which includes the group number.
•
Wrap-up Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Wrap-up button. It shows the current status as follows:
Light pattern
Slow red flashing
Red on
Off
Wrap-up
Not Ready
Status
Ready (Wrap-up mode cancel)
• When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode completes a call, neither the PS nor its wired telephone can have Wrap-up time. (
1.24.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
•
Automatic Log-out
A member extension may be logged-out automatically, if the Unanswered time expires a preprogrammed number of times consecutively. The number of consecutive unanswered calls can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group. If the extension is a member of more than one incoming call distribution group, the unanswered number is counted across all corresponding incoming call distribution groups. It is possible to return to the log-in mode manually.
Automatic Log-out feature does not work for the extension in an incoming call distribution group in Ring distribution method (
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution).
•
Log-in/Log-out Monitor
The supervisor extension can monitor and control the log-in/log-out status of the incoming call distribution group members. (
•
Log-in/Log-out Information on SMDR
Log-in/Log-out information can be printed out on SMDR. (
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.8.1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group (Log-in/Log-out, Wrap-up)
Feature Guide 55
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2.2.7
Supervisory Feature
Description
An extension preprogrammed as a supervisor (supervisor extension) can monitor and control each member’s status within the incoming call distribution group using a 6-line display PT.
Feature Description
Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
The supervisor extension can monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the display.
Log-in/Log-out
Monitor and Remote
Control
Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor the log-in/log-out status of the incoming call distribution group members through the corresponding DSS button light.
Remote Control: The supervisor extension can change the status of the members by pressing the corresponding DSS button.
[Example]
<Incoming Call Queue Monitor Display>
31 Jan. 08:13AM FRI
250:Sales Section
Waiting Calls Now :00006
Max. Waiting Time :05'10
--- Date and time
--- Floating extension number/name of incoming call distribution group
--- The number of queuing calls
--- The longest queuing time
EXIT LOG SPRVS
Since 29 JAN. 09:10AM
Total Calls :00996
Overflow Calls :00131
Lost Calls :00039
Average Waiting :02'12
EXIT CLEAR
--- Monitoring starting date and time
--- Total number of incoming calls
--- Total number of overflowed calls
--- The number of lost calls
--- Average queuing time
<Log-in/Log-out Monitor/Remote Control Mode with DSS Button light>
31 Jan. 08:13AM FRI
250:Sales Section
Waiting Calls Now :00006
Max. Waiting Time :05'10
With
EXIT
Log-in/Log-out Monitor
DSS buttons of the incoming call distribution group members show their status.
Light pattern Status
Green on Log-in (Ready)
Slow Green Flashing Log-in (Not Ready)
Red on
Off
Log-out
Extension in another incoming call distribution group
Log-in/Log-out Remote Control
Pressing the button changes the status as follows:
Status Light pattern
Log-out
Log-in (Ready)
Red on
Green on
56 Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
Conditions
•
Available Extension as a Supervisor Extension a)
One supervisor extension can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group, but it need not belong to the group.
b)
One extension can be the supervisor extension of more than one incoming call distribution group.
•
Available Paired DSS Console
The KX-T7640, KX-T7440, and KX-T7441 are available for this feature.
•
Accumulation Value Clear
Accumulation value (total incoming calls/total overflowed calls/lost calls/average queuing time) can be cleared manually. The date and time of clearing is saved and it is shown on the display (monitoring starting date and time). When the value exceeds 99999, before clearing, "****" will be shown.
•
If a call to an incoming call distribution group is overflowed:
If the display is in idle status, it will change to monitor mode for the corresponding incoming call distribution group automatically.
If the display is monitoring another incoming call distribution group, it will not change.
•
Other Features while in Monitor Mode
The supervisor extension can use other features (making calls, pressing the MESSAGE button, etc.) even while in monitor mode. When each operation is finished, his telephone returns to the queue monitor display.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.8.2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group
(Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor)
Feature Guide 57
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
(DND) Features
1.3.1
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.3.1.1
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—
SUMMARY
Description
When an extension user cannot answer calls (e.g., busy, not at the desk), it is possible to forward or refuse the calls using the following features:
1) Call Forwarding (FWD)
2) Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.
FWD
Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations. (
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
2.
DND
An extension user can send the tone to let the caller know he is not available. (
Conditions
•
FWD and DND features apply to:
Intercom calls (including doorphone calls), and trunk calls (including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold.)
•
FWD/DND Button
Both the FWD and DND features for the extension can be customised on a flexible button.
Only one of the features will work at a time.
Multiple types of FWD/DND buttons can be customised on an extension.
•
Group FWD Button
The FWD feature for the incoming call distribution group can be customised on a flexible button. Multiple types of Group FWD buttons can be customised on an extension.
[FWD/DND Button and Group FWD Button Types]
Type
FWD/DND for
Extension
FWD/DND—Internal
FWD/DND—External
FWD/DND—Both
Description
Works for incoming intercom calls
Works for incoming trunk calls
Works for all incoming calls
58 Feature Guide
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
Type Description
FWD for
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group
Group FWD—Internal Works for incoming intercom calls
Group FWD—External Works for incoming trunk calls
Group FWD—Both Works for all incoming calls
[Button Status—FWD/DND Button]
The FWD/DND button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Red on
Slow red flashing
Off
Status (default)
FWD on
DND on
FWD/DND off
The functions assigned to the "on" and "flashing" patterns can be changed through system programming.
[Button Status—Group FWD Button]
The Group FWD button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Red on
Off
Status (default)
FWD on
FWD off
[Mode Change]
When either the FWD or DND feature is assigned, pressing the FWD/DND button changes the on/off setting alternately. When both the features are assigned simultaneously, pressing the button changes the settings as follows:
FWD DND Off
Note
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) in idle status will produce one of the following results, selected through system programming:
When in FWD/DND Setting Mode:
Pressing the button will enter personal programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.
When in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode:
Pressing the button will cycle the settings as shown above in [Mode Change].
A FWD/DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle
Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.
• When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from trunk calls (forwarding type, forward destination, DND on/off), we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD/
DND—Internal and FWD/DND—External, and/or Group FWD—Internal and Group
FWD—External, because:
a)
the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) and the Group FWD—Both button will indicate the setting for either trunk calls
Feature Guide 59
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
or intercom calls, but not both.
Note
The FWD and DND icons on a PS display reflect the settings for trunk calls only.
b)
pressing the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) or the Group FWD—Both button will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom calls and trunk calls separately.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
60 Feature Guide
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.2
Call Forwarding (FWD)
Description
Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their calls to preset destinations.
The circumstances under which the calls are forwarded are as follows:
All Calls
Busy
Type
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Circumstance
Any time
Follow Me:
When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving the desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension.
When the extension user’s line is busy.
When the extension user does not answer within a preprogrammed time (
Call Forwarding—No Answer Time [605]).
When the extension user’s line is busy or the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time (
Depending on the type of incoming intercom or trunk calls, it is possible to set different destination for each.
Extension
Forwards to
Another Extension
Trunk Calls to
Extension
Available Forwarding Type:
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Forwards to
Outside Party
Incoming Call Distribution Group
Intercom Calls to
Incoming Call
Distribution Group
Trunk Calls to
Incoming Call
Distribution Group
Forwards to
Another Extension
Forwards to
Outside Party
Available Forwarding Type: All Calls
Feature Guide 61
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
[Available Destination]
Destination
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-
OPX)
PS
Incoming Call Distribution Group
Availability
Condition for Original
Extension/Incoming Call
Distribution Group
Only available when FWD to extension is allowed through
COS programming.*
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
–
–
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +
Phone no.
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)
–
Only available for incoming trunk calls. Incoming intercom and doorphone calls cannot be forwarded to a DISA floating extension number.
–
Only available when FWD to trunk is allowed through
COS programming.
–
Only available when FWD to trunk is allowed through
COS programming.
*: If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis (
Block), the FWD feature to the extension does NOT work.
Conditions
[General]
•
FWD for Trunk Calls/Intercom Calls
The FWD feature can be set for trunk calls, for intercom calls, or for both of them by the extension user.
•
FWD from Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group FWD)
COS programming determines the incoming call distribution groups that can use this feature.
•
FWD to Trunk
COS programming determines the extensions or incoming call distribution groups that can forward calls externally (
Call Forwarding to Trunk [504]).
The original extension’s TRS/Barring and ARS still apply to the forwarded call.
62 Feature Guide
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
•
Trunk Call Duration
If a call between an extension user and an outside party, or between two outside parties is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer (
Call Duration [472] and Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration [473]). If the timer expires, the line will
be disconnected. (
• Multiple FWD
Calls can be forwarded up to four times. The following forwarding features are counted as
Multiple FWD:
– FWD—Busy or Busy/No Answer (in case a destination extension is busy), or All
Calls
– Idle Extension Hunting—Overflow
– Intercept Routing—Busy/DND (in case a destination extension is busy or in DND mode)
– Incoming Call Distribution Group—Overflow
Incoming call
A
Original destination
1
B
2
C
3
D
4
E
5
F
In the above illustration, forwarding stops at the extension E. However, forwarding can go farther in the following cases:
– If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the forward destination by the FWD—No Answer or Busy/No Answer feature.
– If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the intercept destination by the Intercept Routing—No Answer feature.
– If a call waits in a queue of an incoming call distribution group, and then the call is redirected to the overflow destination by the Queuing Time Table. (
In the above cases, the forwarding counters reset to zero, and calls can be forwarded up to four times again from the applicable extension that occurred in the case above.
Incoming call
A
Original destination
1
B
2
C
3 1
D
FWD—No Answer
E
2
F
•
Boss & Secretary feature
It is possible to call the original extension from the destination extension regardless of the forward setting.
FWD—All Calls
Incoming call
Boss
(Original)
Call or transfer a call
Secretary
(FWD destination)
Feature Guide 63
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
•
Message Waiting
While calls are forwarded, Message Waiting information is not forwarded. The Message button light turns on at the originally called extension. (
•
Idle Extension Hunting
Idle Extension Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in an idle extension hunting group.
[All Calls and Busy]
• If the forward destination is not available to answer a call, this feature is cancelled and the original destination will ring for the following type of call:
– Doorphone call
– Trunk calls via the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) cards
[No Answer and Busy/No Answer]
•
No Answer Time
The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension (
Call Forwarding—No Answer Time [605]).
[Follow Me]
• This feature is only available when the original extension has disabled the "
Deny Remote
Operation by Other Extension
" setting on a COS basis.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.5.1 Forwarding Calls
64 Feature Guide
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.3
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Description
An extension user can make use of the DND feature. If this feature is set, calls will not arrive at the extension, but arrive at other extension by using the Idle Extension Hunting feature (
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting) or the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature (
Routing). When a destination cannot be found, the calling extension will hear the DND tone,
while the calling outside party will hear a busy tone.
Conditions
•
DND for Trunk Calls/Intercom Calls
The DND feature can be set for trunk calls, for intercom calls, or for both of them by the extension user.
•
DSS button in DND Mode
The DSS button light will turn red if the assigned extension has set DND.
•
DND Override
An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their COS (
•
Paging DND
It is programmable whether the PBX pages extensions in DND mode through system programming. (
•
Intercept Routing—Busy/DND
If a call arrives at the extension in DND mode, the call can be redirected to the preprogrammed destination by the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature.
•
Idle Extension Hunting
While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension which has DND set will be skipped. The call will go to the next extension in the group, not the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND destination.
• If (1) the trunk call via the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card arrives at the extension in DND mode and (2) the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND destination is not available and (3) there is no available extension in the idle extension hunting group, then the original extension in
DND mode will ring.
• Calls from a doorphone arrive at the extension even when the extension is in DND mode.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
1.7.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
Feature Guide 65
1.4 Answering Features
1.4
Answering Features
1.4.1
Answering Features
1.4.1.1
Answering Features—SUMMARY
Description
An extension user can answer incoming calls by the following methods:
Destination
At the own
extension
(PT only)
Feature
Line
Preference—
Incoming
Description Details in
A user can select the line seized when going off-hook.
A user can answer an incoming call simply by pressing the flashing button.
–
Direct Onetouch
Answering
Hands-free
Answerback
At another extension
Call Pickup—
Directed/Group
A user can receive a call automatically and establish a hands-free conversation.
A user can pick up a specified extension’s call or a call in a specified call pickup group.
66 Feature Guide
1.4 Answering Features
1.4.1.2
Line Preference—Incoming
Description
A PT user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences:
Each of these line preferences can be assigned on each extension through personal programming (Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming).
Type
No Line
Prime Line
Ringing Line
(default)
Description
Selects a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer an incoming call after you go off-hook.
Answers a call arriving at a Flexible CO or ICD Group button (on which the "Prime Line" is assigned) simply by going off-hook. This works even when multiple calls are received simultaneously.
Answers the longest ringing call at one’s telephone simply by going off-hook when multiple calls arrive.
Conditions
[Prime Line]
• The priority of the incoming call is as follows:
1) The call arriving at a button on which the "Prime Line" is assigned.
2) The call arriving at the INTERCOM button.
User Manual References
User Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Feature Guide 67
1.4 Answering Features
1.4.1.3
Call Pickup
Description
An extension user can answer a call ringing at any other extension.
The following types are available:
Directed
Group
Type Picking up Call Type
A specified extension’s call.
A call within a specified call pickup group.
Call Pickup Deny:
Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at your extension is also possible.
Conditions
• Call Pickup applies to:
Intercom, trunk, and doorphone calls
•
Internal Call Block
An extension which cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis (
Block) also cannot pick up any calls ringing at those extensions.
[Directed Call Pickup]
• A user can also pick up a specified extension’s call (except an ISDN extension’s call and broadcasting call) by pressing the corresponding DSS button. COS programming determines the extensions that can use this feature.
The light pattern of a DSS button for an incoming call to an extension or incoming call distribution group can be programmed through system programming. Call Pickup is available only when the DSS button is red flashing.
[Group Call Pickup]
• A specified number of call pickup groups can be created (
Group [650]), each of which consists of user groups. One user group can belong to several
call pickup groups. (
[Example]
Call Pickup Group 1 Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3
User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4
Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107
User Manual References
User Manual
1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
68 Feature Guide
1.4 Answering Features
1.4.1.4
Hands-free Answerback
Description
A PT user with a speakerphone can talk to a caller without lifting the handset. If the user receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, a hands-free conversation is established in the following method:
Type
Intercom Call
Trunk Call*
Answering Method
Established immediately after a beep tone at the called extension and the caller hears a confirmation tone.
Established after a specified number of rings, a called extension hears a beep tone.
*: Including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold.
Conditions
•
Hands-free Answerback applies to:
Intercom calls and trunk calls, including calls directed to an incoming call distribution group in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method. (
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution)
•
Hands-free Answerback for Trunk Calls
System programming is required to use this feature.
•
Secret Monitor
The beep tone which the called party hears before answering can be eliminated through system programming.
•
Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override
Hands-free Answerback overrides the Alternate Receiving mode preset on the telephone and the Alternate Calling mode from the caller.
•
Hands-free Answerback with Headset
The Hands-free Answerback feature can also be used with a headset.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)
Feature Guide 69
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5
Making Call Features
1.5.1
Predialling
Description
A display PT user can check and correct the number to be dialled on-hook. The call will be initiated after going off-hook.
Conditions
•
Storing the Predialled Number in the Personal Speed Dialling
The predialled number can be stored in the Personal Speed Dialling by pressing the AUTO
DIAL/STORE button. (
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System) In this case, the
extension will enter into the personal programming mode automatically so that a name can be assigned for the stored number.
User Manual References
User Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
70 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.2
Automatic Extension Release
Description
After going off-hook, if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period, the user will hear reorder tone. This operation applies to intercom calls only.
This feature is also known as Automatic Station Release.
Conditions
• A PT/PS user hears reorder tone for a preprogrammed time period, and then the PT/PS goes back to the idle status automatically. However, an SLT user will just hear reorder tone until he goes on-hook.
•
This feature works in one of the following cases:
When making an intercom call
a)
The first digit has not been dialled within a preprogrammed time period.
b)
After a digit is dialled, if subsequent digits are not dialled within a preprogrammed time period.
Feature Guide 71
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.3
Intercom Call
Description
An extension user can call another extension user.
Conditions
•
Extension Number/Name Assignment
Extension numbers (
Extension Number [003]) and names (
are assigned to all extensions. The assigned number and name are shown on display PTs during intercom calls.
•
DSS Button
It is possible to access another extension with one-touch by pressing the corresponding
Direct Station Selection (DSS) button. A flexible button can be customised as a DSS button.
•
Call Directory—Extension Dialling
Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored names on the display.
•
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party talks to the user immediately after a confirmation tone. Denying voice-calling can also be selected.
•
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
A caller can change the called party’s preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice). By doing so, ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. The called party may deny voice-calling.
•
Tone after Dialling
After dialling an extension number, a user will hear one of the following:
Type
Ringback Tone
Confirmation Tone
Busy Tone
DND Tone
Description
Indicates the called party is being called.
Indicates the called party has set voice-calling.
Indicates the called party is busy.
Indicates the called party has set DND.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.1 Basic Calling
1.2.6 Alternating the Calling Method (Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice)
1.11.2 Using the Directories
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
72 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.4
Trunk Call Features
1.5.4.1
Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
Description
An extension user can use the following features when making a trunk call:
Feature Description Details in
Emergency Call
A user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension.
Account Code
Entry
A user can enter an account code to identify outgoing calls for accounting and billing purposes.
Pulse to Tone
Conversion
A user can temporarily convert the Pulse mode to DTMF mode to access special services.
Pause Insertion
A user can insert a preprogrammed Pause time into a dialling number by pressing the PAUSE button, or it is automatically inserted between the user-dialled code (e.g., Host PBX Access code or Special Carrier Access code) and the following digits.
Feature Guide 73
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.4.2
Emergency Call
Description
An extension user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers (
[304]) after seizing a trunk regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension.
Conditions
• A specified number of emergency numbers can be stored (some may have default values).
• Emergency numbers may be called even when:
– in Account Code—Forced mode (
– in any TRS/Barring levels (
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))
– after the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached (
– in Extension Lock (
•
CLIP Number Notification (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
When dialling an emergency number, the preassigned CLIP number for the extension will be sent as a location identification number. (
1.20.1.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP))
The CLIP number assigned to the extension will be sent regardless of the settings such as CLIR or CLIP number assigned to an ISDN port to be used. This feature is only available when using a PRI (PRI23) line, with E911 compatible services.
74 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.4.3
Account Code Entry
Description
An account code is used to identify outgoing trunk calls for accounting and billing purposes.
The account code is appended to the SMDR call record. Therefore, for example, the firm uses an account code for each client so that the firm can determine what calls were made for the client, and can submit a bill to the client according to the client’s account code on the SMDR call record.
There are two methods of entering account codes as follows:
One of the methods is selected for each extension on a COS basis (
Mode
Option
Forced
Description
A user can enter an account code if needed at any time desired.
A user must always enter an account code before seizing a trunk so as not to forget entering the code.
Conditions
• An account code can be stored into Memory Dialling (e.g., One-touch Dialling).
•
Account Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Account button. The Account button is used in place of the feature number for entering an account code. This button is useful because it can be used at any time, while the feature number entry is allowed only when hearing a dial tone before seizing a trunk.
• Account code entry after receiving a disconnection signal from a trunk must be done while hearing reorder tone. Otherwise the SMDR call record is output and entry becomes impossible afterwards.
• If the account code is entered more than once, the code entered last is printed out in the
SMDR.
• Even in Forced mode, emergency numbers can be dialled out without an account code.
(
• PT users can also enter an account code for incoming trunk calls during a conversation.
•
Verified Code Entry
To identify who made a trunk call for accounting and billing purpose, a verified code is used. This code can be used at any extension. (
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.1 Basic Calling
Feature Guide 75
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.4.4
Dial Type Selection
Description
The dialling mode (rotary or tone) can be selected for each analogue trunk through system programming (
LCOT Dialling Mode [410]) regardless of originating extension (under
contract with the telephone company).
There are the following modes:
Mode
DTMF (Dual Tone
Multi-Frequency)
Pulse Dial (Rotary)
Description
The dialling signal from an extension is converted to tone dialling.
DTMF signals are transmitted to the trunk.
The dialling signal from an extension is converted to rotary dialling.
Rotary pulses are transmitted to the trunk.
Conditions
•
Pulse to Tone Conversion
It is possible for an extension user to temporarily convert the Pulse mode to DTMF mode so that the user can access special services such as computer-accessed long distance calling or voice mail services. To convert to the DTMF mode, wait for a preprogrammed time period (Default: 5 seconds) after the trunk is connected, or press . This feature works only on trunks set to Pulse mode. DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode.
• It is possible to select a pulse rate for the trunk port which has been set to Pulse mode (
LCOT Pulse Rate [411]). There are two pulse rates: Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps).
• It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to the trunk port which has been set to DTMF mode (
LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration [412]).
76 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.4.5
Reverse Circuit
Description
The circuit in the PBX can detect the reverse signal from the telephone company when an extension user is trying to make a trunk call. This detects the start (a called party goes offhook) and end (the called party goes on-hook) of an outgoing trunk call. When an trunk call is received, the circuit can also detect the reverse signal after an outside caller goes on-hook.
The duration of call can be verified on SMDR using this feature (
It is possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal for outgoing trunk calls only, or for both outgoing and incoming trunk calls, or for no trunk call (disable the detection) through system programming (
Feature Guide 77
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.4.6
Pause Insertion
Description
A preprogrammed Pause time (
LCOT Pause Time [416]) will be inserted manually or
automatically.
Manual Insertion: Pressing the PAUSE button.
Automatic Pause Insertion: A pause will be automatically inserted between the user-dialled codes below and the following digits.
a)
Host PBX Access code (
1.5.4.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the
Telephone Company from a Host PBX))
b)
Special Carrier Access code (
1.5.4.8 Special Carrier Access Code)
c)
Second Dial Tone Waiting code
Conditions
• The Pause time is programmable for each trunk.
• Pause can be stored in Memory Dialling.
• Pressing the PAUSE button while dialling a number inserts a pause for a preprogrammed time period.
• When a preprogrammed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, pauses are inserted a preprogrammed number of times after the code.
78 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.4.7
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX)
Description
This PBX can be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting extension ports of the host PBX to trunk ports of this PBX. A Host PBX Access code assigned through system programming (
Host PBX Access Code [471]) is required to access the
telephone company from the host PBX. The Trunk Access number of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code on a trunk group of this PBX basis.
A preprogrammed Pause time (
LCOT Pause Time [416]) will be automatically inserted
between the user-dialled Host PBX Access code and the following digits. (
[Example]
Telephone Company
Host PBX
Access Code: 0
Host PBX
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Idle Line
Access No.: 9
TRG1
PBX
Extn. 101 Extn. 102
Dials "0-01-23-4567".
Host PBX
Access Code
Telephone
No.
Dials "9-0-01-23-4567".
Idle Line
Access No.
Telephone No.
Host PBX
Access Code
Dials "9-101".
Idle Line
Access No.
Extn. No.
of the Host PBX
Note: "0" should be assigned as a Host PBX Access code for trunk group (TRG) 1 of this PBX.
Feature Guide 79
1.5 Making Call Features
Conditions
•
TRS/Barring
TRS/Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX. (
Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))
•
SMDR
The dialled number including the Host PBX Access code can be recorded on the SMDR when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX.
• To record on the SMDR only long distance calls (not local calls) originated via the specific trunk group, assign the long distance call code as a Host PBX Access code to the trunk group.
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
80 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.4.8
Special Carrier Access Code
Description
If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access code assigned through system programming (
Special Carrier Access Code [303]) is required
every time when a trunk call is made.
A preprogrammed Pause time (
LCOT Pause Time [416]) will be automatically inserted
between the user-dialled Special Carrier Access code and the following digits. (
Conditions
•
TRS/Barring
TRS/Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Special Carrier
Access code. (
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))
•
If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX:
A Special Carrier Access code and a Host PBX Access code should be assigned separately: these codes cannot be assigned together as one code. (
Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX))
Feature Guide 81
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.5
Seizing a Line Features
1.5.5.1
Seizing a Line Features—SUMMARY
Description
An extension user can select the line seized for making calls by the following methods:
Feature Description
Line Preference—
Outgoing
A user can select the line seized when going off-hook.
Trunk Access
A user can select the Trunk Access method every time he makes a trunk call.
Details in
82 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.5.2
Line Preference—Outgoing
Description
A PT user can select the outgoing line he prefers to originate calls on, from the following line preferences, through personal programming (Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing):
Feature
Intercom
Idle Line
No Line
Prime Line
Description
When an extension user goes off-hook, an extension line is selected automatically.
When an extension user goes off-hook, an idle trunk is selected automatically from the assigned trunk groups.
When an extension user goes off-hook, no line is selected. He must select the desired line to make a call.
When an extension user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected automatically. A prime line can be selected from the Line Access buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, ICD Group.
Conditions
•
Line Preference Override
A user can override the preset Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired Line
Access button or Memory Dialling button (e.g., One-touch Dialling) before going off-hook.
• To select Idle Line Preference, the trunk groups available to the extension should be programmed on a COS basis (
Trunk Group Number [500]). Also trunk groups available
for Idle Line Access should be assigned (
Idle Line Access (Local Access) [103]).
User Manual References
User Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Feature Guide 83
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5.5.3
Trunk Access
Description
There are the following features to access a trunk.
Feature
Idle Line
Access (Local
Access)
Trunk Group
Access
S-CO Line
Access
Description Accessing method
Selects an idle trunk automatically from the assigned trunk groups.
Dial the Idle Line Access number. Or press a L-CO button.
Selects an idle trunk from the corresponding trunk group.
Dial the Trunk Group Access number and a trunk group number. Or press a
G-CO button.
Selects the desired trunk directly. Dial the S-CO Line Access number and the trunk number. Or press the S-CO button.
Conditions
• COS programming determines the trunk groups available for making calls (
• Trunk numbers can be referred on a trunk port basis (
•
Button Assignment
A flexible button can be customised as a G-CO, L-CO, or S-CO button as follows:
Type
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Group-CO (G-CO)
Single-CO (S-CO)
Assignable parameter
No parameter (All assigned trunk groups through system programming are applied.)
A trunk group is assigned.
A specified trunk is assigned.
It is possible to assign trunks in the following ways:
– The same trunk to the S-CO button and to a G-CO button
– The same trunk group to more than one G-CO button
– More than one L-CO button
Dialling the Trunk Access number selects a CO button according to the priority: S-CO
•
Direct Trunk Access
By pressing an idle CO button, it automatically switches on the hands-free operation mode and allows a user to use On-hook Dialling. The user need not press the SP-PHONE button, MONITOR button, or lift the handset.
•
Group Hunting Order for Idle Line Access
An idle trunk is selected from the trunk groups assigned for Idle Line Access. If multiple trunk groups are available, the trunk group hunting sequence can be determined through system programming.
84 Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
•
Trunk Hunting Order for Idle Line Access and Trunk Group Access
The trunk hunting sequence in a trunk group; from lowest numbered trunk, from highest numbered trunk or rotation, can be determined through system programming.
• A company name or customer name can be assigned on a trunk port basis (
Trunk Name [401]) so that the operator or extension user can view the destination which
the caller is trying to reach before answering.
• It is possible to identify the trunk port that has a trunk connected to it (
Connection [400]). This prevents extension users from originating a call to a trunk which
is not connected.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.1 Basic Calling
Feature Guide 85
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6
Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1
Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.1
Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY
Description
An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX extension data and/or the
PBX system data. A stored number is dialled automatically with a simple operation.
1. Features
Feature Storing Method
One-touch Dialling
• Personal Programming
• System Programming
(PC Programming only)
KX-T7710 One-touch
Dialling (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200 only)
System Programming
(PC Programming only)
Details in
Last Number Redial
(Outgoing Call Log)
The last dialled telephone number(s) is automatically stored.
Speed
Dialling
Personal
• Personal Programming
• Personal Operation with the Feature
Number
• System Programming
(PC Programming only)
System
System Programming
Quick Dialling
System Programming
(PC Programming only)
Hot Line
Incoming Call Log
• Personal Programming
• Personal Operation with the Feature
Number
• System Programming
(PC Programming only)
Incoming call information is automatically stored.
86 Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
2. Valid Input
0–9/ /#
Input
PAUSE (Pause)
FLASH/RECALL
(Hooking)*
INTERCOM
(Secret)*
TRANSFER
(Transfer)*
Display while
Entering
0–9/ /#
P
F
[/]
T
Description
Stores the digits, and #.
Stores a pause by pressing the PAUSE button.
(
Stores a flash/recall signal (EFA mode) by pressing the FLASH/RECALL button at the beginning of the number. (
Conceals all or part of the number by pressing the
INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the end of the number to be concealed. It is programmable whether the concealed part will appear on the SMDR.
Stores a transfer command by pressing the
TRANSFER button at the beginning of the number (used only for a One-touch Dialling). (
[Example] Storing "T + 305"= Transferring a call to extension 305.
*: Available only when in the system/personal programming mode
[Example]
When storing the number "9-123-456-7890" and concealing the telephone number "123-
456-7890",
Enter 9 INTERCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 INTERCOM
.
Notes
• It is possible to store a Memory Dialling feature number in the beginning of the
Memory Dialling numbers.
• It is possible to store several feature numbers in one Memory Dialling location.
Conditions
•
Trunk Access by Memory Dialling
A specific Trunk Access number can be stored with the telephone number in Memory
Dialling. However, if Memory Dialling is done after selecting a trunk, the stored Trunk
Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected trunk.
Feature Guide 87
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.2
One-touch Dialling
Description
A PT user can access a person or feature by one-touch. This is activated by storing the number
(e.g., extension number, telephone number, or feature number) in a One-touch Dialling button.
Conditions
•
One-touch Dialling Button
A flexible button can be customised as a One-touch Dialling button.
•
Full One-touch Dialling
There is no need to go off-hook before pressing the One-touch Dialling button.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
88 Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.3
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
Description
The Message button and One-touch buttons on all KX-T7710 telephones connected to the
PBX can be customised at once through system programming. The same extension number, telephone number, or feature number will be assigned to the same buttons on each KX-T7710, useful for hotel room extensions or similar applications.
[Programming Example]
Button
MESSAGE
Desired Number
702 (Message Waiting [To Call Back])
One-touch Dial 01 100 (Front Desk)
One-touch Dial 02
7601 (Wake-up Call)
One-touch Dial 03 102 (Restaurant)
: :
The MESSAGE button is programmed by default to call back a caller who left a message waiting indication, however, the MESSAGE button can be programmed to perform other features. The eight One-touch buttons have no default setting.
Conditions
• The KX-T7710 has two modes, NORMAL mode and PBX mode, selected by a switch on the telephone. This feature is available only when the KX-T7710 is in the PBX mode.
• This feature is available while hearing a dial tone.
• Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX-T7710 for additional information.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
Feature Guide 89
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.4
Last Number Redial
Description
Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialled to allow the same number to be dialled again.
Automatic Redial:
If Last Number Redial is performed in hands-free mode and the called party is busy, redialling will be automatically retried a preprogrammed number of times (
Times [205]) at preprogrammed intervals ( Automatic Redial Interval [206]). The Redial Call
No-answer Ring Duration time is programmable.
This feature is available only on certain PT models which have the SP-PHONE button.
Outgoing Call Log:
The last five dialled numbers are automatically stored at each extension. A display PT user can redial easily any of the stored numbers.
Conditions
• The memorised telephone number is replaced by a new one.
• If any dialling operation is done or an incoming call is answered during Automatic Redial,
Automatic Redial is cancelled.
• Automatic Redial is not available for some countries/areas when using an analogue trunk.
•
Interrupt Redial
When the called party or the seized trunk is busy, it is possible to press the REDIAL button continuously until the called party or the trunk becomes idle. There is no need to go offhook, before pressing the REDIAL button.
•
Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button
Pressing the REDIAL button on a display DPT while on-hook can display the Outgoing Call
Log. System programming is required for this operation.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.3 Redial
1.11.1 Using the Call Log
90 Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.5
Speed Dialling—Personal/System
Description
An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialling for frequently dialled numbers which are stored in the PBX extension data, or the PBX system data (
Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling.
Conditions
[General]
• Any number (e.g., telephone number, feature number) can be stored in a speed dialling number. A name can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialling number through personal programming, and System Speed Dialling number (
• Call Directory—Speed Dialling
Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored names on the display.
[Personal Speed Dialling]
•
Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock
An extension user can lock the Personal Speed Dialling number display to prevent other users from viewing the number. In this case, the Incoming and Outgoing Call Log information displays are also locked. An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (
1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN))
[System Speed Dialling]
•
TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling
It is possible to override the TRS/Barring using the System Speed Dialling (
Barring Level for System Speed Dialling [509]). (
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call
•
System Speed Dialling Display by AUTO DIAL/STORE Button
Pressing the AUTO DIAL/STORE button on a display DPT while on-hook can display the
System Speed Dialling Directory.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
1.11.1 Using the Call Log
1.11.2 Using the Directories
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
3.3 Customising Your System (System Programming)
Feature Guide 91
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.6
Quick Dialling
Description
An extension user can access a person or feature easily. This is enabled by storing the number
(e.g., extension number, telephone number or feature number) for Quick Dialling.
Conditions
• Quick Dialling is convenient in the following cases:
– Room service calls in a hotel
– Calling another branch via the public network. The extension user needs to dial only the extension number of another branch.
• Quick Dialling numbers follow the flexible numbering plan.
(
2.3.5 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering)
• The storing example is as follows:
Location No.
Quick Dialling No.
Quick Dialling 01 110
Desired Number
9110 (Trunk Call)
:
Quick Dialling 02 5
Quick Dialling 03 2011
: :
3016 (Room Service)
90123456789 (Another Branch)
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
92 Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6.1.7
Hot Line
Description
An extension user can make an outgoing call by only going off-hook, if the user has previously stored the telephone number or the extension number.
If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off-hook, a dial tone is generated for a specified
Waiting time assigned through system programming (
Hot Line Waiting Time [204]) and then
dialling starts. During the Waiting time the user can dial another party, overriding the Hot Line feature.
This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling.
Conditions
•
Capable Telephone
PT, SLT, T1-OPX, and PS
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.2 Easy Dialling
Feature Guide 93
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7
Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.1
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Description
If the line is busy when a call is made, callback ringing will inform the caller when the line becomes free using this feature. After the extension answers the callback ringing, the dialled number is automatically redialled.
Conditions
• If the callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds, the callback is cancelled.
• If the extension hears a busy tone before dialling the telephone number, only the trunk or trunk group is reserved. After answering the callback ringing, the extension should dial the telephone number.
• An extension can set only one Automatic Callback Busy. The last setting is effective.
• Multiple extension users can set this feature to one trunk simultaneously.
However, a maximum of four extension users can set this feature to one extension.
• The priority of the callback is the setting order.
• This feature cannot be used for calls to a VPS or an ISDN extension.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
94 Feature Guide
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.2
Executive Busy Override
Description
Allows an extension user to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Executive Busy Override Deny:
It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being intercepted by another extension user.
Conditions
• COS programming determines extension users who can use the Executive Busy Override
(
Executive Busy Override [505]) and set the Executive Busy Override Deny mode (
Executive Busy Override Deny [506]).
• This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions:
a)
Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security (
has been set.
b)
While being monitored by another extension (
c)
While receiving OHCA (
1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)) or Whisper
OHCA (
d)
During a Conference call (
e)
During a doorphone call (
f)
While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (
g)
During Consultation Hold.
(Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.)
• This feature is not available for a trunk-to-trunk call via DISA.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
1.7.7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override
Deny)
Feature Guide 95
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.3
Call Monitor
Description
Allows an extension user to listen to the busy extension user’s existing conversation. The user can hear the conversation, but the user’s voice is not heard. If desired, interrupting the call to establish a three-party conference call is available.
Conditions
• COS programming determines extension users who can use this feature.
• This feature is available only when the busy extension is in a conversation with another extension or outside party.
• This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions:
a)
Executive Busy Override Deny (
1.7.2 Executive Busy Override) or Data Line
Security (
1.10.5 Data Line Security) has been set.
b)
While receiving OHCA (
1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)) or Whisper
OHCA (
c)
During a Conference call (
d)
During a doorphone call (
e)
While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (
f)
During Consultation Hold.
(Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.)
• This feature stops when the busy extension user presses the following buttons during a conversation (
1.19.1 Fixed Buttons and 1.19.2 Flexible Buttons):
– FLASH/RECALL button
– HOLD button
– TRANSFER button
– CONF (Conference) button
– DSS button
– EFA button
– Two-way Record button
– Two-way Transfer button
– One-touch Two-way Transfer button
– Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
96 Feature Guide
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.4
Second Call Notification to Busy Extension
1.7.4.1
Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY
Description
When attempting to call a busy extension (ringing or having a conversation), an extension user can send call waiting indication to the busy extension (Call Waiting). The notification receiving method depends on the called extension’s personal setting and the telephone type:
Notification
Receiving Method
Call Waiting Tone
Off-hook Call
Announcement
(OHCA)
Whisper OHCA
Description Details in
Sends the Call Waiting tone to the busy extension.
Talk with the busy extension using the built-in speaker and microphone of the called extension while the existing call is made using the handset.
Give a message to the busy extension through the handset.
Conditions
• Each extension user can choose to receive Call Waiting tone, OHCA, Whisper OHCA, or none of these.
• OHCA and Whisper OHCA are enabled or disabled by the COS of the calling extension.
• OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not work for some telephone types. In such cases, the Call
Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension.
Calling
Extension’s
OHCA COS
Mode
Disable
Called Extension’s Call Waiting Mode
OFF
Cancel
Call Waiting disabled
Call Waiting Tone
Call Waiting tone
ON
OHCA
Call Waiting tone
Whisper OHCA
Call Waiting tone
Enable Call Waiting disabled
Call Waiting tone OHCA
(or Call Waiting tone)
Whisper OHCA
(or Call Waiting tone)
• The notification receiving methods (Call Waiting tone, OHCA, and Whisper OHCA) are available when the called extension is having a conversation with other party. If not, the calling extension will be kept waiting until the called extension becomes available to receive the notification. Even while waiting, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone.
• If none of these notification receiving methods, Call Waiting tone, OHCA, or Whisper
OHCA is set at the called party, the caller will hear reorder tone.
Feature Guide 97
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
98 Feature Guide
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.4.2
Call Waiting Tone
Description
When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (ringing or having a conversation), the Call Waiting tone can be sent to the called extension to let him know another call is waiting.
Conditions
• This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call Waiting. If it is activated, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone.
• Call Waiting tone can be selected (Tone 1 or Tone 2) through personal programming (Call
Waiting Tone Type Selection).
User Manual References
User Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Feature Guide 99
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.4.3
Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
Description
An extension user can talk with a busy extension through the built-in speaker and microphone of the called party’s PT. If the existing call is using a handset, a second conversation is made using the speakerphone and microphone so that the called extension can talk to both parties.
Conditions
• COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature.
• This feature is available when the called extension uses one of the following telephones:
– KX-T7625, KX-T7630, KX-T7633, KX-T7636
– KX-T7536
– KX-T7436
– KX-T7235 (except KX-T7235G/FR/SL/NE)
• If the KX-T7235G/FR/SL/NE are connected to the PBX, the OHCA feature for the
KX-T7235 should be disabled through system programming.
• The OHCA feature cannot be used in the following cases:
(a) COS or called extension's telephone type is not available for this feature.
(b) The called extension (DPT) is connected to a PC (PC Console or PC Phone) via the USB Module.
(c) The called extension (DPT) is in the Digital XDP connection.
The Call Waiting tone is sent to the called extension. (
• While an extension is receiving OHCA, if the extension user places the current trunk call on hold or transfers the current intercom call or trunk call, OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will start to hear a ringback tone.
• While an extension is receiving OHCA, if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold, the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset.
100 Feature Guide
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7.4.4
Whisper OHCA
Description
An extension user can give a message to a busy extension through the handset.
Conditions
• COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature.
• This feature is available when the calling and called extension use one of the following telephones:
– KX-T7600 series
– KX-T7500 series
– KX-T7400 series (except KX-T7451)
• If the Whisper OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or telephone type, the Call
Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension. (
• If the called extension does not use a KX-T7600, KX-T7500, or KX-T7400 series telephone but forces Whisper OHCA, the announcement may be heard by the other party.
• It is possible to enable Whisper OHCA on any telephone. However, it may not work properly. (e.g., The voice may be heard by the other party.)
• While an extension is receiving Whisper OHCA, if the extension user places the current trunk call on hold or transfers the current intercom call or trunk call, the Whisper OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will start to hear a ringback tone.
• While an extension is receiving Whisper OHCA, if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold, the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset.
Feature Guide 101
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features
1.8
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
Features
1.8.1
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
Description
TRS/Barring can prohibit an extension user from making certain trunk calls by COS programming. It is applied when the user goes off-hook, a trunk is seized and then a dialled number is sent to the trunk.
Each COS is programmed to have a TRS/Barring level for each time mode (day/lunch/break/ night).
There are seven levels available. Level 1 is the highest level and the level 7 is the lowest. That is, level 1 allows all trunk calls and level 7 prohibits all trunk calls. Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables.
Denied Code Tables
An outgoing trunk call made by an extension with a level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the applicable Denied Code Tables. If the leading digits of the dialled number (not including the Trunk Access number) are not found in the table, the call is made. There are five
Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively.
Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited. These numbers are defined as denied codes.
Exception Code Tables
These tables are used to override a programmed denied code. A call denied by the applicable
Denied Code Tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code Tables, and if a match is found, the call is made.
There are five Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively.
Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes. These numbers are defined as exception codes.
TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling
If the call is made using System Speed Dialling, the call can override the TRS/Barring. Each
COS is programmed to have a TRS/Barring level for System Speed Dialling (
Override by System Speed Dialling [300]).
Once this feature is set, it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialling calls with the level for System Speed Dialling. Any extension which sets Extension Lock can also make a call using System Speed Dialling.
102 Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features
TRS/Barring Level
TRS/Barring level is determined by the applicable levels of Denied Code Tables and Exception
Code Tables.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Level 6
Level 7
Denied Code Tables
*1
Not Programmable
Table for Level 2
Tables for Levels 2 and 3
Exception Code Tables
*2
Not Programmable
Tables for Levels 2 through 6
Tables for Levels 3 through 6
Tables for Levels 2 through 4 Tables for Levels 4 through 6
Tables for Levels 2 through 5 Tables for Levels 5 through 6
Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Tables for Level 6
Not Programmable Not Programmable
*1
:
*2
:
TRS/Barring Exception Code [302]
Explanation:
Level 1: Allows all calls.
Level 2: Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Table for Level 2 except the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6.
Level 3: Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6.
•
•
•
Level 7: Allows intercom calls only.
[Programming Example]
COS No.
1
2
:
Day
1
2
:
Level for Time Mode
*1
Lunch Break
1
2
:
1
2
:
Night
6
6
:
Level for System
Speed Dialling
1
1
:
*2
*1
*2
:
:
TRS/Barring Level for System Speed Dialling [509]
Feature Guide 103
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features
[Flowchart]
An extension user makes
a trunk call.
Is the call made by System
Speed Dialling ?
No
No
Checks the
TRS/Barring level for the time mode of the extension's COS.
Yes
Is TRS/Barring Override by
System Speed Dialling enabled?
Yes
Checks the TRS/Barring level for System Speed
Dialling of the extension's COS.
Level 7
Level 1
What is the TRS/Barring level?
Levels 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Is the dialled number found in applicable Denied Code Tables?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the dialled number found in applicable Exception Code Tables?
No
The call is denied.
The user hears reorder tone.
The call is made.
104 Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features
Conditions
WARNING
The software contained in the TRS/Barring feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP-TO-DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
• A COS should be assigned for each extension. (
• TRS/Barring checks are applied to the following:
– ARS
– Trunk Access (Idle Line/Trunk Group/S-CO Line)
• It is programmable whether " " or "#" is checked by the TRS/Barring. This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls which could be possible through certain telephone company exchanges.
• It is programmable whether TRS/Barring checks the digits dialled after the External
Feature Access during a trunk call. (
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA))
•
Host PBX Access Code/Special Carrier Access Code
TRS/Barring checks for numbers dialled with a Host PBX Access code (
PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) or a
Special Carrier Access code (
1.5.4.8 Special Carrier Access Code) in the following
cases:
Type
Host PBX
Access Code
Stored
Found Not found
Deletes the code. A
TRS/Barring check is carried out on the following digits.
The call is made
(excepted from TRS/
Barring).
Special Carrier
Access Code
Deletes the code. A
TRS/Barring check is carried out on the following digits.
TRS/Barring checks the whole number.
Not stored
TRS/Barring checks the whole number.
TRS/Barring checks the whole number.
•
ARS
If ARS is applied to a dialled number, TRS/Barring will check the user-dialled number (not the modified number by ARS). In this case, a Host PBX Access code and/or a Special
Carrier Access code will not be checked.
• Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation
The dialling of digits can be restricted while engaged on a received trunk call. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the preprogrammed limitation, the line will be disconnected.
• A TRS/Barring level can be changed by some features. The priority of features, when multiple features are used, is as follows:
1) Dial Tone Transfer (
2) Budget Management (
3) TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling
Feature Guide 105
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features
4) Walking COS/Verified Code Entry
(
1.8.5 Walking COS, 1.8.6 Verified Code Entry)
5) Extension Lock
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
106 Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features
1.8.2
Budget Management
Description
Limits the telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on an extension basis. If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit, an extension user cannot make further trunk calls. An extension assigned as the manager may increase the limit or clear the amount of the call charge.
Conditions
• If the limit is reached, TRS/Barring Level 7 is applied. (
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call
•
Budget Management for Verified Call
If an extension user make a trunk call with a verified code, the call charge will be counted on the verified code (not the extension). (
1.8.6 Verified Code Entry) The limit of the call
charge can be assigned on each verified code.
• The pay tone service or ISDN Advice of Charge (AOC) service is required for this feature.
• It is possible to select whether to disconnect the line after an alarm tone or only to send an alarm tone when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit during a conversation.
User Manual References
User Manual
3.2.2 Manager Programming
Feature Guide 107
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features
1.8.3
Extension Lock
Description
An extension user can change the TRS/Barring level of the telephone (
(TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)) so that other users cannot make inappropriate trunk calls. An
extension personal identification number (PIN) is used to unlock the telephone (
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)).
This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.
Conditions
• This feature also restricts changing the FWD destination. (
•
Remote Extension Lock
Overrides Extension Lock. If an extension assigned as the manager sets Remote
Extension Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user, the user cannot unlock it. If a manager extension unlocks an extension that has been locked by the extension user, the extension will be unlocked.
This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.
•
TRS/Barring Level
COS programming determines the TRS/Barring level for Extension Lock (
Level for Extension Lock [510]).
User Manual References
User Manual
1.5.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Lock)
2.1.1 Extension Control
108 Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features
1.8.4
Dial Tone Transfer
Description
An extension assigned as the manager can change the TRS/Barring level (
Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)) for the extension user temporarily. After that, the
extension user can make his call.
[Example] An extension user can call a manager to release the restriction on outgoing call
(e.g., international calls).
(3) Make a trunk call
(2) Change
TRS/Barring level
Guest Room
(Trunk call restricted)
(1) Call
Manager
Toll Restriction/
Call Barring button
Conditions
• The changed level effects just one time.
•
Toll Restriction/Call Barring Button
A manager extension must store the desired TRS/Barring level in the Toll Restriction/Call
Barring button. A flexible button can be customised as the Toll Restriction/Call Barring button.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
2.1.3 Restriction Level Control (Dial Tone Transfer)
Feature Guide 109
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features
1.8.5
Walking COS
Description
An extension user can use another extension telephone with the COS assigned on his own extension temporarily. The extension accesses his own extension from another telephone and operates features with the same conditions which are assigned his own extension. It is one of the remote operations. An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature (
1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)).
Conditions
• The following items are applied:
– COS programming
– Budget Management (
– Itemised Billing code for ARS (
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS))
– Extension number recorded on the SMDR (
•
Walking COS through DISA
This feature is also available through the DISA. (
1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
110 Feature Guide
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features
1.8.6
Verified Code Entry
Description
An extension user can make a trunk call with a verified code from his own or any other extension to change the TRS/Barring level (
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)) or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A verified code personal
identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature.
Conditions
WARNING
When a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/ extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)
Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.
b)
Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.
c)
Change the PIN frequently.
• The following items are applied:
– COS programming
– Budget Management
– Itemised Billing code for ARS
– The + verified code recorded on the SMDR instead of the extension number
(
1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
•
Verified Code Entry through DISA
This feature is also available through the DISA. (
1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access
•
Verified Code PIN
A verified code PIN must be assigned for each verified code through system programming
(
Verified Code Personal Identification Number (PIN) [122]) or through manager
programming.
•
Verified Code PIN Lock
If the wrong PIN is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If the incorrect PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, the PIN against the verified code will be locked. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it.
In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.
Feature Guide 111
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features
•
Budget Management for Verified Calls
A limit of the call charge can be assigned on each verified code.
[Example of Verified Codes and Their Programming]
Location
No.
0001
0002
:
Verified
Code
*1
User
Name
*2
Verified
Code PIN
1111 Tom Smith 1234
2222 John White 9876543210
: : :
COS
No.
*3
1
3
:
Itemised
Billing Code for ARS
Budget
Management
2323 5000Yen
4545
:
3000Yen
:
*1
:
*2
:
*3
:
Verified Code COS Number [123]
Feature Guide References
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
3.2.2 Manager Programming
112 Feature Guide
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
1.9
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
1.9.1
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Description
ARS automatically selects the carrier available at the time an outgoing trunk call is made according to preprogrammed settings. The dialled number will be checked and modified to connect the appropriate carrier.
[Carrier Selection Procedure Flowchart]
The numbers X in the flowchart correspond to the [Programming Procedures] on the following pages.
A trunk call is made.
No (Normal Trunk Access)
Sends the telephone number to the userselected carrier.
Yes
Yes
Is the dialled number found in the
No
Is the dialled number found in the
Yes to determine which carrier to use.
No
No
Yes
Is there an available
Yes
Modifies the dialled number by
Sends the modified number to the trunk.
No
Because all trunks are busy?
Yes
Sends a busy tone.
No
Is normal
Trunk Access allowed?
No
Sends a reorder tone.
Yes
(default)
Sends the telephone number by the Idle Line
Access.
Feature Guide 113
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
[Programming Procedures]
1.
ARS Mode Assignment (
It is possible to select whether ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method or when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk
Access method. (
2.
Leading Number Exception Table Assignment
Store the telephone numbers that will avoid using the ARS feature.
2
ARS Leading Number Exception Table
Location
No.
001
002
:
033555
06456
:
Leading No.
Exception
*1
*1
:
3.
Leading Number Table Assignment
Store the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading number that will be routed by
Assignment") is selected for each number.
The additional (remain) number of digits must be assigned only when "#", for example, is needed after a dialled number. The "#" is added after the assigned number of digits of dialled number (excluding a leading number).
3
ARS Leading Number Table
Location
No.
Leading
No.
*1
0001
0002
039
03
0003
:
0444
:
Additional (Remain)
No. of Digits
Routing Plan
Table No.
*2
7
0
5
:
1
4
5
:
*1
:
*2 :
ARS Routing Plan Table Number [322]
If a dialled number matches a leading number, the number will be modified according to the corresponding Routing Plan Table and the modified number will be sent to the trunk when the assigned additional (remain) number of digits are dialled.
If a dialled number matches multiple leading number entries, the leading number entry with the lowest numbered location will have priority.
114 Feature Guide
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
[Example]
Dialled
Number
039-123-4567
Corresponding
Routing Plan Table No.
1
Description
"039" is found in location 0001 and seven digits (assigned additional [remain] number of digits in location 0001) were dialled. The
Routing Plan Table 1 is selected just after the seventh digit.
039-654-321 1
038 4
"039" is found in location 0001 and the
Inter-digit time expired before the seventh digit is received. The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected after the Inter-digit time expired.
"03" is found in two locations (locations
0001 and 0002), so the PBX waits for the next digit "8". "038" is not found in any location, then "03" (location 0002) is selected. The Routing Plan Table 4 is selected.
4.
Routing Plan Table Assignment
Arrange the time schedule as desired and store the carrier priority.
Time Table
5
As the best carrier may vary with the day of the week and the time of day, four time blocks
(Time-A through D) can be programmed for each day of the week.
Carrier Priority
6 in each time block. The carrier is selected in the entry order (the order in which entries are listed).
3
ARS Leading Number Table
Location Leading
No.
No.
Additional
(Remain)
No. of Digits
Routing Plan
Table No.
0001
:
03
:
8
:
1
:
4
ARS Routing Plan Table
Routing Plan Table
1
5
SUN
Time Table*
1
Time-A
Time-B
9:00
12:00
6 Carrier*
2
Priority 1 Priority 2
1 (A telecom)
1 (A telecom)
4 (D telecom)
2 (B telecom)
:
SAT
Time-C
Time-D
:
Time-A
Time-B
Time-C
Time-D
15:00
21:00
:
9:00
1 (A telecom) 2 (B telecom)
: :
3 (C telecom) 2 (B telecom)
12:00
15:00
21:00
3 (C telecom) 1 (A telecom)
3 (C telecom) 1 (A telecom)
3 (C telecom) 2 (B telecom)
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
*1
:
*2
:
ARS Routing Plan Time Table [330]
ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) [331–346]
Feature Guide 115
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
5.
Carrier Table Assignment
A specified number of carriers can be programmed. Assign the following items for each
Carrier Table: of the user-dialled number.
116 Feature Guide carrier.
[Command Explanation]
Command
Number Add the number.
C
P
Description
Add the Carrier Access code.
Analogue Line: Insert a pause.
ISDN/T1/E1 Line: Insert a pause and change to tone (DTMF) signal.
A
G
I
H Add the dialled number after the digits are removed (Home position).
[Programming Example]
7
Carrier Table
8
9
Carrier Name
*1
Removed Number of Digits
*2
10
Carrier Access Code
*3
11
Trunk Group
*4
12
Modify Command
1
A telecom
6
0077
1, 2, 3
CH#12
2
B telecom
0
0088
1, 2
CH
[Example]
Dialled number: 0123456789
(Trunk Access no. is ignored.)
Modification:
12
012345 6789 0077 6789 #12
H
9
Remove 6 digits.
#12 Add the number.
C
Add the Carrier Access
*1
:
*2
:
ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access [352]
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
*3
:
*4
:
ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access [351]
6.
Optional Assignment
An Authorisation code can be assigned for each carrier and each tenant.
Authorisation Code for a Trunk Group 14
An Authorisation code can be assigned for each trunk group and each carrier.
Itemised Billing Code
15
An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension and for each verified code.
If a call is not made from an extension (e.g., DISA or TIE) and no verified code is used, the
Itemised Billing code assigned in the location 1 of the verified code will be used.
Conditions
WARNING
The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP-TO-DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
•
The Dialled Number on the SMDR
It is possible to choose to print either the user-dialled number or the modified number on the SMDR through system programming. (
1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording
•
ARS Data Download/Upload
It is possible to download or upload the following ARS data to the PBX using PC programming:
–
–
–
2
3
4
ARS Leading Number Exception Table
ARS Leading Number Table
ARS Routing Plan Table
This is useful when a carrier has changed the call charge, and the updated data can be used for multiple customers.
• A TRS/Barring check is done before ARS is applied. (
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call
Feature Guide 117
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.1 Hands-free Operation
Description
A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific buttons (e.g.,
REDIAL) automatically activate hands-free mode.
Conditions
•
PTs with the MONITOR Button
PTs with the MONITOR button can only dial in hands-free mode and cannot be used for hands-free conversations.
118 Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.2 Off-hook Monitor
Description
A PT user can let others listen to the user’s conversation through the built-in speaker, during a conversation using the handset.
Conditions
• Capable Telephone
KX-T7400 series and KX-T7500 series (display PT only), and all KX-T7600 series telephones
To enable this feature, system programming is required. If disabled, hands-free conversation is performed instead.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation (Off-hook Monitor)
Feature Guide 119
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.3 Mute
Description
During a conversation, a PT user can disable the speaker microphone or the handset microphone to consult privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the built-in speaker or the handset receiver. The user can hear the other party’s voice during Mute. Only your voice will be muted.
Conditions
• This feature is available with all PTs that have the AUTO ANS/MUTE button.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.6 Mute
120 Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.4 Headset Operation
Description
This PBX provides headset compatible PTs. A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset.
For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset.
This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.
Conditions
• A headset is an option.
• If the headset mode is on, pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built-in speaker.
• To set the headset mode on a DPT, use personal programming (Headset Operation) or press the Headset button. To set headset mode on an APT, use the handset/headset selector provided on the set and/or on the headset.
•
Headset Button
A flexible button on a DPT can be customised as the Headset button. The Headset button can be also assigned to a flexible button on an APT, but the button does not work.
•
Answer/Release Button
A flexible button can be customised as an Answer button or a Release button. Such buttons are useful for headset operation. It is possible to answer an incoming call by pressing an Answer button. While hearing the Call Waiting tone during a conversation, pressing an Answer button enables one to answer the second call by placing the current call on hold. Pressing a Release button enables one to disconnect the line during or after conversation, or to complete a Call Transfer.
• It is possible to switch the headset mode to the hands-free mode or vice versa during a conversation by pressing the Headset button.
• Headset users cannot use the following features:
– Automatic Redial (
– Receiving OHCA (
1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA))
– Receiving Whisper OHCA (
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.3.5 Using the ANSWER/RELEASE Button
1.4.8 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
Feature Guide 121
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.5 Data Line Security
Description
Once Data Line Security is set on an extension, communication between the extension and the other party is protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall and Executive Busy
Override. Extension which has data devices connected (e.g., fax machine) may set this feature to maintain secure data transmission against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.7.9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line Security)
122 Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
Description
The FLASH/RECALL button (Flash/Recall mode or Terminate mode) or Terminate button
(Terminate mode) is used when a PT user disconnects the current call and originates another call without hanging up first. It performs as going on-hook and then going off-hook.
[Explanation of Each Mode]
Flash/Recall Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone from the line used last. For example, if a trunk call is disconnected, the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the telephone company.
Terminate Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone determined by the Line Preference—Outgoing setting. (
1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing)
Conditions
• FLASH/RECALL Button Mode
One of the following modes can be selected for each extension through system programming:
– Flash/Recall mode
– Terminate mode
– External Feature Access (EFA) mode. (
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA))
•
Terminate Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Terminate button.
•
Disconnect Time (Only for Flash/Recall Mode)
The amount of time between successive accesses to the same trunk is programmable for each trunk port (
• This feature outputs an SMDR call record (
1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)), restarts the call timer, inserts the automatic pause, and checks the TRS/Barring
level (
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)) again.
• If the ARS mode is on (
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)) or if a trunk call is
established through the INTERCOM button or ICD Group button, the Terminate mode will be always effective even though the Flash/Recall mode has been set.
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 123
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Description
An extension user can have access to the features of a host PBX or the telephone company, such as Transfer, Hold, Call Waiting, etc. A flash/recall signal is sent to the host PBX or the telephone company. This is only available on trunk calls (including Host PBX Access [
1.5.4.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)]).
Conditions
•
Flash/Recall Time
The Flash/Recall time can be assigned for each trunk port (
•
EFA Button
A flexible button can be customised as the EFA button.
• Pressing the FLASH/RECALL button which is set to EFA mode (
Terminate) or the EFA button performs this feature. It is also possible to perform this
feature by entering the feature number when the current call is placed on a Consultation
Hold.
(Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.)
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.9.2 If a Host PBX is Connected
124 Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Description
Trunk calls are limited by the following features:
Extension-to-Trunk Call
Duration
Feature Description
If a call between an extension user and an outside party is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group (
Duration [472]). Both parties will hear an alarm tone 15 seconds
before the time-limit at five second intervals. If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected.
COS programming determines to enable or disable this feature
(
Trunk Call Duration Limitation [502]). Whether this feature is
applied to outgoing calls only or all calls is also programmable.
Trunk-to-Trunk Call
(except Unattended
Conference Call)
Duration
If a call between two outside parties is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group (
Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration [473]). Both parties
will hear an alarm tone 15 seconds before the time-limit at five second intervals. If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected.
The timer is applied for a trunk call which is made via the PBX.
If both call is made by the extension (e.g., a trunk call made by an extension is transferred to an outside party), the shorter limit will apply to the call.
Budget Management
When the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached, an extension user will start to hear an alarm tone three times at five second intervals and the user cannot make further trunk calls.
Whether the line is disconnected after the alarm tone is programmable. (
Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation
While engaged on a received trunk call, the dialling of digits can be restricted. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the limitation, the line will be disconnected.
Conditions
• During an Unattended Conference Call, the Unattended Conference Recall time is applied. (
Feature Guide 125
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone
Description
Multiple telephones can be connected to the same port. This is useful to increase the number of telephones without additional extension cards. The combinations and features of the parallelled telephones are described below.
Features Descriptions
Parallel
Mode
Parallel connection allows the connection of an
SLT to an APT or a DPT that is connected to a
Super Hybrid port.
When parallel mode is enabled, the two telephones function as follows:
• Both share one extension number
(main telephone’s extension number).
• Either telephone can make or answer a call.
• If one goes off-hook while the other is on a call, the call is switched to the former.
EXtra Device
Port (XDP)
Mode
XDP mode can be used when the main telephone in a parallel connection is a DPT connected to a Super Hybrid port.
Unlike parallel mode, each telephone can act as a completely different extension with its own extension number. (
Connections
PBX
APT/DPT + SLT
DPT
SLT
Extn. 101 Extn. 101
APT SLT
Extn. 102 Extn. 102
PBX
DPT + SLT
DPT
SLT
Extn. 101 Extn. 105
Digital XDP The Digital XDP allows two DPTs to be connected together when one of them is connected to the following port:
Deleted: the
• a DPT or Super Hybrid port (with the
KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)
• a Super Hybrid port (with the KX-
TDA15)
The DPT that is connected directly to the PBX is called the "master DPT", and the DPT connected to the master is the "slave DPT".
Like XDP mode, each telephone can act as a completely different extension with its own extension number.
In addition to a slave DPT, the master DPT
(connected to a Super Hybrid port) can have an
SLT in parallel or XDP mode.
PBX
DPT + DPT
Master
Slave
DPT DPT
Extn. 101 Extn. 201
PBX
DPT + DPT + SLT
Master
Slave
DPT DPT
Extn. 101 Extn. 201
SLT
Extn. 101 (in Parallel Mode)
or
Extn. 105 (in XDP Mode)
126 Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
Features Descriptions
Wireless
XDP Parallel
Mode
For this connection, refer to the Wireless XDP
Parallel mode feature. (
Connections
APT/DPT/SLT + PS
PBX
PT
Extn. 101
PS
Extn. 101
SLT
Extn. 102
PS
Extn. 102
Conditions
[APT + SLT]
• If one telephone goes off-hook while the other is on a call, a three-party call is established.
If one user goes on-hook, the other user continues the call.
• An extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is:
– playing background music (BGM)
– receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker.
• The SLT will always ring for incoming calls (if its ringer is turned on). It cannot be programmed to not ring.
[DPT + SLT]
• When in the parallel mode, the XDP mode of the Super Hybrid port should be off through system programming.
• Whether the SLT rings for incoming calls is programmable.
Ring on: Both telephones ring except when the PT is in Hands-free Answerback mode
(
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback) or voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving Ring/
Voice) (
Ring off: Only the PT rings. However, the SLT can answer the call.
• If one goes off-hook while the other is on a call, the call is switched to the former. However, the call will not be switched in one of the following conditions:
a)
While being monitored by another extension. (
b)
While receiving OHCA (
1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)) or Whisper
OHCA. (
c)
During a Conference call (
d)
While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (
Feature Guide 127
1.10 Conversation Features
[DPT + DPT]
•
Available Telephones
KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7640)
•
KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only
Digital XDP connection enables the maximum number of DPTs that the PBX supports to be increased. This increase is only available when (1) the MEC card is installed and (2) a high-capacity power supply unit (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) is installed or an additional AC adaptor (with the KX-TDA30) is connected.
•
KX-TDA15 only
Digital XDP connection is available only for a DPT that is connected to a Super Hybrid port.
• When using Digital XDP connection, the following features cannot be used with the DPTs:
a)
OHCA: A call waiting tone will be heard even if the OHCA feature is set.
b)
USB Module: The DPTs will not work correctly if a USB Module is connected. Do not connect USB Modules to the DPTs.
Note
Even if the slave DPT is disconnected, the OHCA feature and USB Module still cannot be used with the master DPT. To use them, the DPT must be disconnected from the PBX, and then reconnected.
[DPT + DPT + SLT]
• When an SLT is connected to the slave DPT in parallel mode, the SLT works as the parallel extension of the master DPT.
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.3.2 MEC Card
2.7.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions
2.7.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.5.6 MEC Card
6.6.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions
6.6.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection
User Manual References
User Manual
1.7.11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring (Parallelled Telephone)
128 Feature Guide
1.10 Conversation Features
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Description
The Calling Party Control (CPC) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from the analogue trunk when the other party is hung up. To maintain efficient utilisation of trunks, the PBX monitors their state and when CPC signal is detected from a line, the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension with reorder tone.
Conditions
• CPC signal detection is programmable for incoming trunk calls (
Detection Time—Incoming [414]), and for outgoing trunk calls ( LCOT CPC Signal
Detection Time—Outgoing [413]).
• If your telephone company sends signals similar to CPC, it is recommended not to enable
CPC signal detection on outgoing trunk calls.
• If CPC signal is detected during a Conference call (
1.13.1.2 Conference), the line is
disconnected. The remaining parties stay connected.
• If CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature (
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) and an extension or an outside party, the line is
disconnected.
Feature Guide 129
1.11 Transferring Features
1.11 Transferring Features
1.11.1 Call Transfer
Description
An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or an outside party. The following features are available:
Feature
With
Announcement
Without
Announcement
Transferring method
Transfer is completed after announcing the destination party.
Transfer is completed without an announcement.
After dialling the destination, while hearing a ringback tone, the originator can replace the handset.
Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Screened.
Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Unscreened.
Conditions
• If Music on Hold is enabled, music can be sent to the held party while the call is transferred. (
1.12.4 Music on Hold) It is programmable whether a ringback tone or
music is sent (
• If the transfer destination extension has set FWD to an outside party, the call will be transferred to the outside party. (
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
• COS programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer a call to an outside party (
Call Transfer to Trunk [503]). COS can also prohibit transferring to an extension
of another PBX via the TIE line service using the PBX Code method (Access with PBX
Code) (
•
Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement
If the transfer destination does not answer within the preprogrammed Transfer Recall time
(
Transfer Recall Time [201]), the call will be redirected to the Transfer Recall destination
assigned to the extension which transferred the call. If the destination is not assigned, the call will return to the extension.
[Available destination]
Destination
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-
OPX)
PS
Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
Availability
130 Feature Guide
1.11 Transferring Features
Destination
DISA
Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +
Phone no.
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)
Availability
•
One-touch Transfer
The DSS Console and the PT user can hold a call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the DSS button directly. A One-touch Dialling button can also be used if the
TRANSFER command is stored with a number (
1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features).
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Feature Guide 131
1.12 Holding Features
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.1 Call Hold
Description
An extension user can put a call on hold. The following features are available depending on the result.
Feature
Call Hold General
Exclusive Call Hold
Description
Any extension can retrieve a held call.
Only the extension user who held the call can retrieve it.
The result of the holding operation can be determined through system programming. Pressing the HOLD button again just after the first time alternates the mode between General and
Exclusive Call Hold.
Conditions
• A PT user can hold an intercom call and multiple trunk calls simultaneously. An SLT user can hold either an intercom call or a trunk call. To hold multiple intercom calls on a PT simultaneously, use the Call Park feature (
1.12.2 Call Park). Call Park feature can also
be used to hold multiple intercom calls and/or trunk calls simultaneously on an SLT.
•
Music on Hold
Music, if available, is sent to the held party. (
•
Hold Recall
If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period (
[200]), Hold Recall is heard at the extension which put the call on hold. If the extension is
engaged in a call, the Hold Alarm will be heard.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, the call is automatically disconnected. This timer starts when Hold Recall activates.
•
Automatic Call Hold
A PT user can be programmed holding of the current call when pressing another CO/ICD
Group/INTERCOM button, through system programming. If this feature is not enabled, the current call will be disconnected.
[Example]
It is possible to receive a call by pressing the flashing ICD Group button, this puts the current intercom call (on the INTERCOM button) on hold. To return to the held call, press the INTERCOM button.
•
Call Hold Retrieve Deny
If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis (
Block), he cannot retrieve the held call which the extensions made.
•
SLT Hold Mode
It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT in the following methods through system programming:
132 Feature Guide
1.12 Holding Features
Mode 1
Hold Transfer to Trunk Transfer to Extension
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Trunk Access No.
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Extension No.
Mode 2
(Default)
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Trunk Access No.
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Extension No.
Mode 3
Mode 4
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Trunk Access No.
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Extension No.
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Trunk Access No.
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Extension No.
If the following occurs frequently with an SLT, choose "
Mode 2
", "
Mode 3
", or "
Mode 4
":
a)
When an SLT user receives a call, reorder tone is heard or nobody answers the call.
b)
When an SLT user goes off-hook, reorder tone is heard instead of a dial tone.
If a call is not terminated after going on-hook, the above cases occur. To avoid these problems, choose "
Mode 2
", "
Mode 3
", or "
Mode 4
". Every call will be terminated unless the Hold feature number is entered after flashing the hookswitch in Mode 2, Mode 3, and
Mode 4.
• Hold Alarm tone pattern has a default. (
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.2 Holding a Call
Feature Guide 133
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.2 Call Park
Description
An extension user can place a call into a common parking zone of the PBX. The Call Park feature can be used as a transferring feature; this releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations. The parked call can be retrieved by any extension user.
Conditions
•
Automatic Call Park
It is possible to select an idle parking zone automatically.
•
Retry
If the specified parking zone is occupied or there is no vacant zone for Automatic Call Park, the originator will hear a busy tone. Retrying is possible while hearing the busy tone by selecting parking zone or a vacant zone.
•
Call Park Recall
If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, Call Park Recall will be heard at the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which parked the call. If the destination is engaged in a call, the Hold Alarm will be heard.
• If a parked trunk call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period (Default: 30 minutes), it is automatically disconnected.
•
Call Park Button
Pressing the Call Park button parks or retrieves a call in a preset parking zone.
A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park button. It shows the current status of the preset parking zone as follows:
Light pattern
Slow red flashing
Off
Status
Parked in the preset parking zone
No parked call
•
Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) Button
Pressing the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button parks a call in an idle parking zone automatically. A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button.
•
Call Park Retrieve Deny
If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis (
Block), he cannot retrieve the parked call which the extensions made.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.2 Holding a Call
134 Feature Guide
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.3 Call Splitting
Description
An extension user can alternate between two other parties. Placing the current call on hold allows the user to have a conversation with the other party.
Conditions
• While having a conversation with one party, the other party is in Consultation Hold.
(Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.)
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
Feature Guide 135
1.12 Holding Features
1.12.4 Music on Hold
Description
Music can be played to any party on hold. The following music sources are available:
a)
Internal music source
b)
External music source
c)
Cyclic tone
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
BGM number (1 or 2) or cyclic tone can be selected for the Music on Hold (
BGM numbers are the same as the external music port numbers (e.g., External music port 1 is BGM1.) However BGM2 includes internal music sources 1 and 2 as well as external music port 2. It is possible to choose what music source will be used as BGM2 (
Selection for BGM (with the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30)/BGM2 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)
[BGM Number and the Music Source]
BGM No.
1
Music Source
External music port 1
2
External music port 2/Internal music source 1 or 2
[KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30]
BGM or cyclic tone can be selected for the Music on Hold (
BGM includes internal music sources 1, 2 and external music port. It is possible to choose what music source will be used as BGM (
Music Source Selection for BGM (with the KX-TDA15/
KX-TDA30)/BGM2 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) [710]).
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: User-supplied music source
• Volume Control
It is possible to change the volume of an internal and/or external music source.
• It is possible to choose a different music source for each tenant. (
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals
136 Feature Guide
1.13 Conference Features
1.13 Conference Features
1.13.1 Conference Features
1.13.1.1 Conference Features—SUMMARY
Description
A conference call allows a conversation between three or more parties simultaneously. The following features are available to establish a conference call:
Feature
Conference
Executive Busy
Override
Description Details in
During a two-party conversation, an extension user can add other parties to establish a conference call with up to eight parties.
An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Privacy Release
During a conversation with an outside party on the S-
CO button, a PT/PS user can allow another extension to join the conversation.
Conditions
• One PBX supports a maximum of 32 simultaneous calls which are engaged in conference calls. (e.g., 4 eight-party conferences, 8 three-party conferences + 2 four-party conferences, 10 three-party conferences)
Feature Guide 137
1.13 Conference Features
1.13.1.2 Conference
Description
This PBX supports three through eight-party conference calls. During a two-party conversation, an extension user can add other parties to their conversation, thereby establishing a conference. More than four-party conferences are only possible when a PT user originates the conference.
Unattended Conference:
A PT user can leave a conference to allow other parties to continue the conversation. The user may return to the conference, if he desires.
Conditions
•
CONF (Conference) Button
For a PT which does not have the CONF button, a flexible button can be customised as the Conference button.
•
Unattended Conference Call Duration
The call duration can be restricted by the Unattended Conference Recall time. The
Unattended Conference Recall time consists of the following programmable timers:
a)
Unattended Conference Recall Start Time:
When the timer expires, Unattended Conference Recall starts to be heard at the conference originator. If the originator does not return to the conference, 1st
Unattended Conference Recall Continuation time will start.
b)
1st Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time:
When the timer expires, an alarm tone starts to be heard at parties in the Unattended
Conference. If the originator does not return to the conference, 2nd Unattended
Conference Recall Continuation time will start.
c)
2nd Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time:
When the timer expires, the Unattended Conference call is disconnected.
If the originator returns to the conference before the Unattended Conference call is disconnected, the timer will be cancelled. If not, Unattended Conference Recall and an alarm tone will continue to be emitted until the Unattended Conference call is disconnected.
•
For Six or More Party Conference
The ECHO card is required. Also the Echocanceller should be enabled through system programming.
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.6.4 ECHO16 Card
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.5.3 ECHO8 Card
Feature Guide References
138 Feature Guide
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
1.13 Conference Features
Feature Guide 139
1.13 Conference Features
1.13.1.3 Privacy Release
Description
By default, all conversations which take place on trunk, extension lines and doorphone lines are protected by privacy (Automatic Privacy).
Privacy Release allows a PT/PS user to suspend Automatic Privacy for an existing trunk call on the S-CO button in order to establish a three-party call.
System programming is required to enable or disable this feature.
Conditions
•
S-CO Button
A flexible button can be customised as the S-CO button.
•
Privacy Release Time
Privacy is released for five seconds to allow the conversation to be joined.
• This feature overrides Data Line Security (
1.10.5 Data Line Security) and Executive
Busy Override Deny (
1.7.2 Executive Busy Override).
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
140 Feature Guide
1.14 Paging Features
1.14 Paging Features
1.14.1 Paging
Description
An extension user can make a voice announcement to many people simultaneously.
The message is announced over the built-in speakers of PT and/or external speakers (external pagers) which belong to the paging group. (With the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, up to two external pagers can be connected; with the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30, one external pager can be connected.)
The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone.
It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call.
Paging Deny:
It is possible to deny being paged on an extension basis.
Paging Group
Each paging group consists of user groups and external pagers. One user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups.
(
[Example]
Paging Group 01 Paging Group 02 Paging Group 03 Paging Group 04
User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3
Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Pager 1 Pager 2
Feature Guide 141
1.14 Paging Features
[Programming Example]
Paging Group
No.
01
02
03
04
05
:
001
:
User Group No.
*1
002 003
: :
*1
:
: Constituent
User Groups of a Paging Group [640]
*2
:
External Pagers of a Paging Group [641]
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
External Pager No.
*2
1 2
: :
Conditions
• Extensions which cannot be paged are:
– PSs
– SLTs
– Ringing or busy PTs
– PTs in Paging Deny mode
– PTs in Paging DND mode
These extensions cannot be paged but can answer the page.
•
External Pager Priority
External pagers can be used with the following priorities:
TAFAS Paging BGM
(
1.16.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS), 1.16.4 Background Music (BGM))
•
Volume Control
Paging volume from the PTs and the external pagers can be changed through system programming.
•
Paging DND
When DND (
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)) is set for incoming calls, it is programmable
whether your extension receives paging through system programming.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.6.1 Paging
1.6.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
142 Feature Guide
1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
1.15.1 Broadcasting (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
Description
A PT user can call multiple parties, assigned as members of a group (broadcasting group), to make a voice announcement. After one member answers the call, the caller can begin to make an announcement. Other members' telephones will continue to ring, and each member can listen to the announcement by answering the call. The caller will hear a confirmation tone every time the members answer the call.
During the announcement, the voices of members will not be heard. However, the caller can allow specific members to speak, making a conference call. A maximum of four-party conference call can be established. This conversation can be heard by the other members.
Broadcasting Group
There are eight broadcasting group, and a maximum of 31 members can be assigned to each group. The available destinations as members of the broadcasting group are as follows:
Destination
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX)
PS
Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analogue/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +
Phone no.
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
Other PBX Extension (TIE with PBX Code)
Availability
*
*
*
*: Only available when the networking type of the trunk is assigned as private.
Conference Call
The caller can allow members to speak, and can control the conversation using the following buttons. Pressing the other buttons during the conversation will be ignored.
Feature Guide 143
1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
DSS
Button
CONF (Conference)
TRANSFER
FLASH/RECALL
(Flash/Recall mode)
SP-PHONE
Function
Establishes a conversation with the corresponding member extension, or remove the extension from the conversation.
Establishes a conversation with the current members in the order assigned in the broadcasting group. Pressing this button again will add the next available member in the group to the conversation.
Removes the member who joined the conversation last. The member can still listen to the announcement.
Removes the member who joined the conversation last. The member will be disconnected from the broadcasting call and hear a reorder tone.
Enables a hands-free conversation.
A member extension can inform to the caller that he wants to speak or join the conversation by sending a notification. The caller will hear a notification tone and the requesting extension’s information will be shown on the display for five seconds.
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: The MEC card
• COS programming determines the extensions (PTs only) that can use this feature.
•
Ring Duration
A system timer is available to limit the call ring duration at the members. When this limit is reached, members' telephones will stop ringing. If no members have answered the call, the caller will hear a busy tone.
• The broadcasting call will reach a member extension regardless of settings such as Call
Forwarding (except DND).
• If a member extension is busy and has Call Waiting for trunk calls activated when a broadcasting call is made, a call waiting tone will be sent to the extension.
• The call information of the caller (not members) will be recorded on the SMDR.
• A caller cannot make a broadcasting call with a call on hold.
• Call Pickup is not available for a broadcasting call. (
• The broadcasting call will not reach members when:
– the member extension has set DND for intercom calls.
– the member extension is a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode. (
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.3.2 MEC Card
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.5.6 MEC Card
144 Feature Guide
1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
User Manual References
User Manual
1.6.3 Making an Announcement and Having a Multiple Party Conversation
(Broadcasting)(KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
Feature Guide 145
1.16 Optional Device Features
1.16 Optional Device Features
1.16.1 Doorphone Call
Description
A visitor using a doorphone will call a preprogrammed destination (extension or outside party).
Extension users can call a doorphone.
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement:
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: An optional Doorphone, the OPB card and DPH card
KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30: An optional Doorphone and the DPH card
• Each doorphone port must be assigned to one tenant. The Time Table (day/lunch/break/ night) of the tenant applies. (
•
Call Destination
The incoming doorphone call destination(s) can be assigned for each time mode (day/ lunch/break/night) for each doorphone port (
Doorphone Call Destination [720]).
Destinations can be selected. (
1.1.2.1 Internal Call Features—SUMMARY)
• COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make an outgoing trunk call.
• Internal Call Block determines which extensions can call a doorphone. (
•
Ring Duration
If an incoming call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period, ringing stops and the call is cancelled.
•
Call Duration
The call duration can be restricted by a system timer. If the timer expires, the call will be disconnected.
•
Door Open
While engaged on a doorphone call, the extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in. (
• A doorphone number can be referenced for each doorphone port (
•
KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30 only
Doorphones 1 and 2 (or 3 and 4) cannot make a call simultaneously. If a visitor presses the doorphone button while the other doorphone is engaged in a call, he will hear no tone.
Doorphones 1 and 2 (or 3 and 4) cannot receive a call simultaneously. If an extension user calls a doorphone while the other doorphone is engaged in a call, he will hear a busy tone.
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.6.1 OPB3 Card
2.6.2 DPH4 Card
2.6.3 DPH2 Card
146 Feature Guide
2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.5.1 DPH4 Card
6.5.2 DPH2 Card
6.9.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers
User Manual References
User Manual
1.9.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
1.16 Optional Device Features
Feature Guide 147
1.16 Optional Device Features
1.16.2 Door Open
Description
An extension user can unlock the door for a visitor using his telephone.
The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed to unlock the door in the COS programming (
Permission for Door Open Access [512]). However, while engaged on a
doorphone call, any extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in (
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener on each door.
• The door opener will unlock the door even if a doorphone is not installed.
•
Door Open Duration
The door can remain unlocked for a preprogrammed time period (
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.10.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.9.1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers
User Manual References
User Manual
1.9.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
148 Feature Guide
1.16 Optional Device Features
1.16.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Description
A ring tone is sent through the external pager when an incoming call is received. Any extension user can answer the call.
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager
•
Floating Extension Number
A floating extension number can be assigned for an external pager (
Floating Extension Number [700]). It is possible to access an external pager by dialling
their floating extension numbers.
•
Pager Volume
It is possible to change the volume of an external pager through system programming.
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals
User Manual References
User Manual
1.3.4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker (Trunk Answer From Any Station [TAFAS])
Feature Guide 149
1.16 Optional Device Features
1.16.4 Background Music (BGM)
Description
A PT user can listen to BGM through the built-in speaker while on-hook and idle.
BGM—External:
BGM can also be broadcast in the office through the external pagers, this can be turned on and off by an extension assigned as the manager.
Conditions
[BGM]
• Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external music source, such as a radio
• The music through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook.
•
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only
Each user can set/cancel BGM, and also select the music source.
•
KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30 only
Each user can only set/cancel BGM; the user cannot make a music selection.
[BGM—External]
• Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external pager
• External pagers can be used with the following priorities:
TAFAS Paging BGM
(
1.14.1 Paging, 1.16.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS))
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals
User Manual References
User Manual
1.7.8 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
2.1.4 Turning on the External Background Music (BGM)
150 Feature Guide
1.16 Optional Device Features
1.16.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Description
An extension assigned as the manager (manager extension) can record outgoing messages
(OGMs) for the following features:
Feature
Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
Queuing Feature
Timed Reminder
Usage Details in
When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will hear a message.
If assigned in the Queuing Time Table of the incoming call distribution group (
Queuing Time Table [631]), any caller who is
waiting in a queue will hear a message.
When answering the Timed Reminder Alarm, the user will hear a message.
Conditions
• Hardware Requirement:
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: The OPB card and MSG card
KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30: The MSG card
•
The Number of Messages and the Recording Time
A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 32 (with the KX-TDA15/KX-
TDA30) messages can be recorded. The recording time per message is a maximum of one minute. However the total recording time in the PBX is 8 minutes.
• A floating extension number can be assigned to each outgoing message (OGM) (
Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730]).
• One MSG card allows 4 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 2 (with the KX-TDA15/KX-
TDA30) messages to play simultaneously. The MSG card expansion does not increase the total recording time or the number of messages. It increases the number of messages that can be played simultaneously.
[Example]
Up to 4 (with the KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 2
(with the KX-TDA15/KX-
TDA30) messages can be played simultaneously to callers.
Up to
8
(with the KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 4
(with the KX-TDA15/KX-
TDA30) messages can be played simultaneously to callers.
PBX
MSG
Card
Total message recording time:
8 minutes max.
PBX
MSG
Card
MSG
Card
Total message recording time:
8 minutes max.
Feature Guide 151
1.16 Optional Device Features
Note
When MSG card expansion has been completed, the new MSG card is blank—all necessary messages will need to be stored in the card. This can be done in two ways:
a)
By installing the new MSG card then recording each message again. The PBX will automatically store the new recordings in each MSG card.
b)
By transferring messages from the PBX to a personal computer (PC) using the
Maintenance Console, then transferring them back to the PBX with the new MSG card installed.
• The same message can also be played simultaneously to multiple callers.
•
Recording Methods a)
Record voice messages through the extension telephone
b)
Transfer prerecorded voice messages from external sound source into the PBX via an external music port.
Note
Record voice messages only; avoid the recording of music.
• After recording messages, a manager extension can also play them back for confirmation.
• Progress tone is sent to a manager extension before recording messages during a preprogrammed time period, or during clearing the prerecorded message stored at the floating extension number of desired message. The longer one is applied.
• Record a message when traffic is light (early morning or late evening).
• When the manager tries to record a message, he will hear ringback tone if a message channel is in use. When all ports of the MSG card(s) become idle, he will hear the progress tone for a preprogrammed time period.
After that, the PBX will automatically proceed into the recording mode.
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.6.1 OPB3 Card
2.6.5 MSG4 Card
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.5.4 MSG2 Card
User Manual References
User Manual
2.1.5 Recording Outgoing Messages (OGM)
152 Feature Guide
1.16 Optional Device Features
1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Description
An outside caller can access specific PBX features as if the caller is an SLT extension user on the PBX, when the incoming call destination is a DISA floating extension number assigned to each DISA message. The caller can have direct access to features such as:
• Placing an intercom call to an extension, operator or any floating extensions (e.g., modem for remote system administration, an external pager for TAFAS).
• Calling an outside party via the PBX.
• Operating some PBX remote features (e.g., FWD)
Outgoing Message (OGM)
When a call arrives on a DISA line, a prerecorded DISA message will greet and guide the caller.
Any extension assigned as the manager can record outgoing messages (OGMs). (
DISA Intercept—No Dial
If the caller fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 1st Dial Time for
Intercept) (
DISA Intercept Time [211]) following the outgoing message (OGM), the call is
redirected to the operator extension.
DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number (DISA AA Service)
After listening to the outgoing message (OGM), the caller may dial a single digit (DISA AA number). The destination for each DISA AA number can be assigned for each message. It is also possible to assign other DISA floating extension number as the destination (Multistep
DISA AA Service).
If the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 2nd Dial Time for
AA), the DISA AA service is not employed.
DISA Security Mode and Available Features
If the DISA AA service is not employed, the caller may access the PBX features by entering the feature numbers. To prevent others from accessing the PBX features, it is possible to assign DISA security (
DISA Security Mode [732]). The features available depend on the
preprogrammed DISA security mode as follows:
Feature Guide 153
1.16 Optional Device Features
Security
Mode
Intercom
Call
TIE Line Call
Without PBX
Code
With PBX
Code
All
Security
Trunk
Security
No
Security
Trunk Call
*
: Available
*
:
If trunk call is available, Account Code Entry (
1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry) is also
available.
Note
DISA AA service and Operator Call (
2.2.5 Operator Features) are available for any
security mode.
Security Mode Override:
If the caller operates with the following features while hearing a DISA message, the security mode can be changed to the No Security mode temporarily:
• Walking COS (
1.8.5 Walking COS): Walking COS feature number + extension
number + extension personal identification number (PIN)
• Verified Code Entry (
1.8.6 Verified Code Entry): Verified Code Entry feature
number + + verified code + verified code PIN
After changing mode, the mode remains in force for the duration of the call.
Available PBX Features with Security Mode Override:
After Security Mode Override is done with the Walking COS feature, the following features are available (It regards a remote operation from the assigned extension [
• FWD
• DND
• Log-in/Log-out (
• Absent Message (
• Extension Lock (
• Time Service Switching Mode (
DISA Intercept Routing—Busy/DND
If the destination called by the outside party is busy or in DND mode, and if (1) the busy destination does not set Call Waiting, FWD, or Idle Extension Hunting or (2) the destination is in DND mode and Idle Extension Hunting is not available, one of the following can be selected through system programming:
a)
Busy Tone: Busy tone is sent to the caller.
154 Feature Guide
1.16 Optional Device Features b)
Intercept Routing: Intercept Routing—Busy/DND will work and the call will be redirected to the preprogrammed destination.
c)
Outgoing Message (OGM): An outgoing message (OGM) will be sent to the caller.
The message for busy/DND mode can be assigned for each outgoing message
(OGM) which has a DISA floating extension number.
DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer
If a destination is not available to answer a DISA call within a preprogrammed time period
(DISA Intercept time) (
DISA Intercept Time [211]) after the call is reached, the call will be
redirected to the programmed destination by the Intercept feature (
Destination [470] or Extension Intercept Destination [604]).
If the intercept destination is not available to answer the call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA Disconnect Time after Intercept) after the DISA Intercept time expires, the call will be disconnected.
SMDR
The call information for DISA is recorded as the one of the DISA floating extension numbers.
(
1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR))
[Programming Example]
The following items can be assigned to each outgoing message (OGM):
Outgoing
Message
(OGM) No.
01
02
:
Floating
Extn.
No.
*1
300
0 1
Automated Attendant No.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
100 301 200 103 202 101 102 400 104 205
Busy/DND
Message No.
04
301
: : : : : : : : : : :
05
:
*1
:
Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730]
Feature Guide 155
1.16 Optional Device Features
[Flowchart]
A DISA call from an outside party is received.
No
Is there an idle port on the
MSG cards?
A
Yes
(DISA Delayed Answer Time
Time-out)
The PBX answers the call.
(DISA Mute Time
Time-out)
The outgoing message (OGM) plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling.
F
Does the trunk group that received the call employ Intercept
Routing Busy DND?
Yes
The call is routed to the intercept destination.
Is the first digit dialled?
Yes
The outgoing message (OGM) stops.
No
(DISA 1st Dial Time for
Intercept Time-out)
The call is routed to the Operator.
(Intercept Routing No Destination)
No
The call is routed to the operator .
(Intercept Routing
No Destination)
Is the second digit dialled?
No
Goes to
C
(DISA 2nd Dial Time for
AA Time-out)
Yes
No
The PBX receives the following dialled digits and checks the dialled number.
Is the first dialled digit assigned a destination for the DISA AA service?
Yes
The call is routed to the destination.
What is the DISA security mode?
Continued to the next page
156 Feature Guide
1.16 Optional Device Features
Continued from the previous page
B
Trunk Security
Is the dialled number an extension number or floating extension number?
Yes
Goes to
C
No
All Security
Is the Walking COS/Verified
Code Entry feature number dialled for Security Mode Override?
What is the dialled number?
No
Yes
Is the correct personal identification number
(PIN) entered?
Yes
Others
Goes to
D
Trunk Access No.
+ Telephone No.
Feature No.
*
(e.g., FWD)
The feature is set.
The dialled number is sent to the trunk.
Extension No./
Floating
Extension No.
C
No
Reorder tone
D
Goes to
B
E
Is the extension idle?
Yes
The extension receives the call.
No
Is the extension busy (Call Waiting mode on) and is not in DND mode?
Yes
The call waits to be received.
No
Does the caller press while hearing reorder tone (Call Retry)?
Yes
No
(DISA Reorder Tone
Duration Time
Time-out)
Goes to
What method is assigned for DISA Intercept
Routing Busy/DND?
A
The call is disconnected.
No
Does the caller press while hearing a ringback tone (Call Retry)?
Yes
Does the destination answer the call?
Goes to
A
No
(DISA Intercept Time
Time-out)
Yes
The call is established.
The call is routed to the intercept destination.
(DISA Intercept Routing
No Answer)
The extension becomes idle.
Intercept Routing
Busy Tone
Outgoing
Message
(OGM)
Goes to
E
No
(Busy Tone
Does the caller press while hearing busy tone (Call Retry)?
Time Time-out)
Yes
The call is disconnected.
Goes to
A
The call is routed to the intercept destination.
(Intercept Routing Busy/DND)
The message for the busy/DND mode is sent to the caller.
Goes to
F
Does the destination answer the call?
Yes
No
(DISA Disconnect
Time after Intercept
Time-out)
The call is established.
The call is disconnected.
Goes to
E
*
:
Feature numbers are available only when the Walking COS feature is used for Security Mode Override.
Feature Guide 157
1.16 Optional Device Features
Conditions
WARNING
When you enable the Trunk-to-Trunk Call feature of DISA, and a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)
Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.
b)
Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.
c)
Change the PIN frequently.
•
Hardware Requirement:
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: The OPB card and MSG card
KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30: The MSG card
•
DISA Delayed Answer Time
It is possible to set the Delayed Answer time (
DISA Delayed Answer Time [209]) so that
the caller will hear a ringback tone within a preprogrammed time period first before hearing an outgoing message (OGM).
•
DISA Mute Time
It is possible to set the Mute time until the outgoing message (OGM) plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling after the caller reaches the DISA line.
•
Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration
If a call between two outside parties is established, the call duration can be restricted by a system timer. (
1.10.8 Trunk Call Limitation) If the timer expires, the line will be
disconnected unless the originating caller retries by pressing " " or extends the time by sending any DTMF signalling. The caller can prolong the call duration within the preprogrammed time period (
DISA Trunk-to-Trunk Call Prolong Time [210]) and
preprogramming number of times.
•
Tone Detection
The following three types of tone detection can be enabled for each trunk group to disconnect a trunk-to-trunk call via DISA.
– Silence Detection (
– Continuous Signal Detection (
DISA Continuous Signal Detection [476])
– Cyclic Signal Detection (
DISA Cyclic Signal Detection [477])
•
Call Retry
While hearing a ringback, reorder, or busy tone, retrying the call is possible by pressing
" ". During a trunk-to-trunk conversation, the result of pressing " " is programmable: retry mode or DTMF mode.
•
DISA Reorder Tone Duration
It is possible to set the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time. Reorder tone will be sent to the caller for a preprogrammed time period. When the timer expires the call will be disconnected. Retrying the call is possible by pressing " " during the DISA Reorder Tone
Duration time.
•
Call Deny
Extensions can deny DISA calls on a COS basis.
•
Verified Code PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock
If the wrong PIN is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If the incorrect PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, the PIN against
158 Feature Guide
1.16 Optional Device Features
the verified code or the extension will be locked. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and will be cleared.
• Each outgoing message (OGM) call have a name through system programming (
Outgoing Message (OGM) Name [731]) for programming reference.
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.6.1 OPB3 Card
2.6.5 MSG4 Card
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.5.4 MSG2 Card
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access
[DISA])
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)
Feature Guide 159
1.17 Caller ID Features
1.17 Caller ID Features
1.17.1 Caller ID
Description
The PBX receives caller’s information, such as the caller’s name and telephone number, on trunks assigned to receive Caller ID. A display PT user can see the information.
The PBX can modify the received number according to preprogrammed tables so that he can call back or memorise it. For example, if the area code is sent and it is not required to return the call, store the area code in the table so that the area code is deleted automatically.
Caller ID to SLT Port (KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30 only):
An SLT user can also see the caller’s information. This feature is available only for SLTs compatible with FSK type Caller ID.
Note
This feature complies with ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) type
FSK and Bellcore type FSK.
1.
Features
Caller ID includes the following features:
Feature
Caller ID (KX-
TDA30/KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200 only)
Description
Caller’s information which is sent from
an analogue trunk.
The following Caller ID signalling types are supported: FSK and DTMF.
Calling Line
Identification
Presentation (CLIP)
Caller’s information which is sent from
an ISDN line.
Automatic Number
Identification (ANI)
(KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200 only)
Caller’s information which is sent from an E1 or T1 line.
–
Details in
160 Feature Guide
1.17 Caller ID Features
2.
Service Features
Features Description Details in
Calling Line
Identification (CLI)
Distribution
Directs a DIL/DID/DDI/MSN call to a CLI destination if the caller’s identification (Caller
ID/CLIP/ANI) has been assigned to the Caller
ID Table.
Incoming Call Log
Caller’s information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension. This information is used for confirming the caller, calling the caller back, and/or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed
Dialling.
3.
Number/Name Assignment
3.1 Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
This PBX automatically modifies the incoming caller’s number according to preprogrammed tables. The modified number will be recorded for calling back.
The PBX supports a number of modification tables, and each trunk group can select a table for use. Each table has ten locations for local/international calls and one for long distance calls.
The PBX checks the local/international call data first. If a match is not found, the long distance call data is applied.
[Example]
<Table Selection>
Trunk
Group No.
1
2
:
Modification
Table
1
3
:
<Modification Table>
Modification Table 1
Area Code Removed No. of Digits Added No.
Local/International
Call Data 1
Local/International
Call Data 2
:
Local/International
Call Data 10
Long Distance Call
Data 1
012
00
:
Not programmable
3
2
:
0
Blank
001
:
0
Note
When caller’s information is sent through an ISDN line and the call type is Subscriber,
National, or International, the following modification table is used instead of the above table:
<Modification Table>
Subscriber Call Data
National Call Data
International Call Data
Removed No. of Digits Added No.
0
0
0
Blank
0
00
Feature Guide 161
1.17 Caller ID Features
<Modification Flowchart>
A trunk call with the caller's information is received.
Checks the Table Selection.
Table 1
Yes: e.g., 00987654321
Checks the local/ international call data.
Matches (Data 2)
Modifies the number as programmed.
Removed number of digits: 2
Added number: 001
Received number: 00987654321
Is the area code found in local/international call data in the modification table?
No: e.g., 3344556677
Checks the long distance call data.
Modifies the number as programmed.
(Removed number of digits: 0,
Added number: 0)
Modified number: 00987654321 = 001987654321
1) Remove the first 2 digits.
2) Add "001".
Modification is completed:
03344556677.
Modification is completed:
001987654321.
3.2 Caller ID Table Assignment
The System Speed Dialling Table is also used as the Caller ID Table.
In each location of the table, the following items can be assigned:
a) Telephone number (Trunk Access number + caller’s telephone number)
b) System Speed Dialling name (caller’s name)
(shown on the display or SMDR)
c) CLI destination
(used for CLI feature)
When a caller’s modified telephone number matches a telephone number (the Trunk
Access number is disregarded.) in the table, the call is sent to the assigned CLI destination.
162 Feature Guide
1.17 Caller ID Features
[Example]
Location
(System Speed
Dialling No.)
000
001
:
Telephone No.
*1
System Speed Dialling
Name
*2
CLI
Destination
90123456789
:
:
ABC Company
:
:
200
:
:
*1 :
*2 :
System Speed Dialling Number [001]
System Speed Dialling Name [002]
3.3 Caller’s Name Reference
A name can also be shown on the display or SMDR. The PBX searches for the name in the following order:
1) Personal Speed Dialling data of the original called extension
2) System Speed Dialling (Caller ID) Table
3) Caller ID name received from the public line (Caller ID Name Reference)
If the name is not found, it will not be displayed.
Conditions
[General]
• Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming (
Type [490] (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)).
• The Caller ID Name Reference is only available for calls from the public network.
•
For Users in New Zealand only
Using the toll services of a company other than Telecom NZ.
If the PBX is set up to use the toll services of a company other than Telecom NZ, the telephone numbers dialled from the Caller Display listings within the PBX will be directed through the toll services of the other company because the telephone numbers include the toll access digit and area code digit. A toll charge may be incurred. Please check with the toll carrier concerned.
[Caller ID to SLT Port (KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30 only)]
• Hardware Requirement: The EXT-CID card
• Through system programming, a group of 4 SLT or Super Hybrid ports can be assigned to receive Caller ID. Up to 2 groups can be programmed. Therefore, a maximum of 8 SLTs can receive Caller ID.
• When the caller’s number is sent to an SLT, a Trunk Access number can be automatically added to the telephone number through system programming for calling back.
• When the caller’s number exceeds 16 digits, the SLT receives only the first 16 digits, not counting the preceding Trunk Access number (if it is programmed to be added).
• If a call is transferred to an SLT, the transferring extension’s information will be shown on the SLT. If the transferring extension goes on-hook, the original caller’s information will be shown.
• When the Caller ID has information, such as private, out of area, or long distance, the information will be shown instead of the caller’s number and name.
Feature Guide 163
1.17 Caller ID Features
• For an SLT that is connected to a DPT in parallel, Caller ID information is available only when the SLT is set to "ring".
• Even if the caller’s name is sent, the name may not be shown depending on the type of
SLT.
• Incoming Call Log information is not shown on the SLT.
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
164 Feature Guide
1.17 Caller ID Features
1.17.2 Incoming Call Log
Description
When an incoming public trunk call with the caller’s information (e.g., Caller ID) is directed to an extension, the information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension.
This information is shown on the telephone display and is used for confirming the caller, calling back, or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Dialling.
[Example]
John White
123456789
12 Dec.10:00AM MON
New: Not Answered
--- Caller's name (20 digits max.)
--- Caller's number (16 digits max.)
--- Date and time of a call received
--- Answering Status*
Call Log buttons
Own extension
Incoming call distribution group
*: "
New
" is displayed for call records which have not previously been viewed;
"
Old
" is displayed for call records which have previously been viewed.
Conditions
•
Call Log Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Call Log button for the extension or an incoming call distribution group. The button light shows the current status as follows:
Light pattern
Red on
Off
Status
There is unchecked information.
All information has been checked.
•
If the answering destination is not the original extension (FWD—No Answer,
Intercept Routing—No Answer, Overflow, and Call Pickup):
If a call is forwarded because of no answer or another extension picks up the call, the information is logged in the call logs of both the original destination and the answering destination. If a call is forwarded to several extensions before answered, the information is logged in the call logs for all the forwarded extensions. If a call is forwarded to an incoming call distribution group and is not answered, the information is not logged in the call log for the incoming call distribution group.
•
Call Log for Incoming Call Distribution Group Calls
If the original destination of a call is an incoming call distribution group, and the call is not answered, the information is logged in the call log for the group. If it is answered, the information is logged in the call log for the answering extension.
•
Call Log for PS Calls
If a PS or a CS is in one of the following situations when a call arrives, the information is logged in the call log for the PS:
Feature Guide 165
1.17 Caller ID Features a)
When the PS is out of range.
b)
When the PS is turned off.
c)
When the CS is busy.
•
Incoming Call Log Display Lock
An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log display to prevent other users from referring to the call information at his extension through personal programming (Directory and Call Log Lock). In this case, the Outgoing Call Log display and the Personal Speed
Dialling number display is also locked. An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (
1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN))
•
Storing the Call Log Information in Personal Speed Dialling
When storing the number and name into Personal Speed Dialling from the call log information, the Idle Line Access number is automatically attached to the telephone number.
•
Incoming Call Log Memory
The total memory for the Incoming Call Log is determined in the PBX. The maximum number that can be logged for each extension and incoming call distribution group is also determined through system programming. If the memory becomes full, the new call record overwrites the oldest one.
Feature Guide References
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
User Manual References
User Manual
1.11.1 Using the Call Log
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
166 Feature Guide
1.18 Message Features
1.18 Message Features
1.18.1 Message Waiting
Description
An extension user can notify another extension user that he wishes to talk to the user. The notified extension user can return the call or listen to the messages left in his mailbox of the
VPS.
When a message is left on a PT, the Message button on it lights or the Message/Ringer Lamp on it turns on red. Pressing the lit Message button while on-hook shows the caller’s information as shown below:
[Example]
105:Tom Smith
--- Extension no. and name of who left the message
Message buttons
Own extension
Incoming call distribution group
Other extension*
*: For example, this button is useful when the secretary checks the message for the boss (Boss &
Secretary Feature).
Conditions
•
Message Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Message button for the extension, other extensions, or an incoming call distribution group.
•
Distinctive Dial Tone for Message Waiting
If the Distinctive Dial mode is enabled, dial tone 4 will be sent to an extension when a message has been left on the extension. (
•
SLT with a Message Waiting Lamp (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
The lamp activates in the same way as the MESSAGE button on a PT, if an MSLC card is connected to the PBX. The Message Waiting Lamp light pattern can be selected from the twelve patterns shown below. System programming for each extension port is required to use this feature.
Feature Guide 167
1.18 Message Features
[SLT Message Waiting Lamp Light Patterns]
5.12 s
1.28 s
Pattern 1
ON
OFF
5.12 s
1.28 s
Pattern 2
ON
OFF
512 ms
1.28 s
5.12 s
Pattern 3
ON
OFF
256 ms
2.56 s
768 ms
Pattern 4
ON
OFF
256 ms
768 ms
5.12 s
Pattern 5
ON
OFF
256 ms
2.56 s
512 ms
Pattern 6
ON
OFF
10.24 s
1.28 s
Pattern 7
ON
OFF
256 ms
1.28 s
20.48 s
Pattern 8
ON
OFF
256 ms
1.28 s
10.24 s
Pattern 9
ON
OFF
20.48 s
1.28 s
Pattern 10
ON
OFF
168 Feature Guide
1.18 Message Features
20.48 s t
10.24 s t=1.28 s
10.24 s
Pattern 11
ON
OFF t
10.24 s t=1.28 s
10.24 s 20.48 s
Pattern 12
ON
OFF
• It is possible to set Message Waiting while hearing a ringback tone, busy tone, or DND tone.
• Messages are always left on the original extension. Messages cannot be sent to their
FWD destination (
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)).
• Both the message sending extension and receiving extension can cancel a left message.
• If the message receiving extension calls the sending extension and is answered, the message will be cleared automatically. However, if the message has been left on the VPS, it depends on the VPS.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
1.9.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Feature Guide 169
1.18 Message Features
1.18.2 Absent Message
Description
The extension users can set the message (e.g., the reason for absence, where he is) on his telephone. When display PT user calls the extension, the message is shown on the caller’s telephone.
The following messages can be programmed as desired:
Type
System message
Personal message
Message
No.
1
Message (Example)
Will Return Soon
2
3
4
5
Description
Gone Home
At Ext %%%%
(Extension
Number)
Back at %%:%%
(Hour:Minute)
Out until %%/%%
(Month/Day)
Messages may be edited through system programming
(
They are used for every extension user commonly.
6
7
8
9
In a Meeting
A message is programmable at each extension through personal programming
(Personal Absent Message), which can only be used by that extension user.
Note
The "%" means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension.
Up to seven "%"s can be stored for each message.
Conditions
• An extension user can select only one message at a time. The selected message is displayed at the extension while on-hook.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.5.2 Showing a Message on the Caller’s Telephone Display (Absent Message)
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
170 Feature Guide
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.19.1 Fixed Buttons
Description
PTs, DSS Consoles, and Add-on Key Modules are provided with the following feature/Line
Access buttons:
Depending on your device type, some buttons may not be provided.
As for buttons on PSs, please refer to the Operating Instructions for each PS.
[PT and Add-on Key Module]
Button Usage
Used to adjust the ringer, speaker, handset and headset volume and the display contrast. Navigator Key and Jog Dial can also be used to select data from the Call Directory and the System Feature Access Menu on the display.
Navigator Key,
Jog Dial,
Volume Key
ENTER
CANCEL
PROGRAM
FLASH/
RECALL
HOLD
VOL
Used to confirm the selected item.
Used to cancel the selected item.
Used to enter and exit the programming mode.
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up (Flash/Recall mode or Terminate mode) or used to send a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access their features (External
Feature Access mode). This button can also be used as a
CANCEL button while on-hook.
Used to place a call on hold.
Feature Guide 171
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
Button
SP-PHONE
(Speakerphone)
MONITOR
MESSAGE
REDIAL
TRANSFER
Flexible CO (Trunk)
INTERCOM
AUTO ANS
(Auto Answer)/
MUTE
VOICE CALL/
MUTE
AUTO DIAL/
STORE
CONF
(Conference)
FWD/DND
PAUSE
Soft
SELECT
SHIFT
MODE
[DSS Console]
Button
ANSWER
RELEASE
172 Feature Guide
Usage
Used for hands-free operation. Also used to switch between handset and hands-free operation.
Used for a hands-free dialling. Also used to monitor the party’s voice in hands-free mode.
Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication.
Used to redial the last dialled number.
Used to transfer a call to another party.
Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to a different Trunk Access button (Default: S-CO) or to another feature button.
Used to make or receive intercom calls.
Used to receive an incoming call in hands-free mode, or used for microphone or handset mute during a conversation. (Dual feature button)
Used to monitor an intercom call automatically (a handsfree conversation is not possible). Also used for handset microphone mute during a conversation.
Used for System/Personal Speed Dialling and storing programme changes.
Used to establish a multiple-party conversation.
Used to perform FWD or DND. (Dual feature button)
Used to insert a pause in a stored number. With an APT, it is used as the PROGRAM button.
Used to select the item displayed on the bottom line of the display.
Used to select the displayed item or to call the displayed number.
Used to access the second level of Soft button items.
Used to shift the display to access various features.
Usage
Used to answer an incoming call or place the current call on hold and answer another call with one-touch.
Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer.
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
Button
Flexible CO (Trunk)
Flexible DSS (Direct Station
Selection)
PF (Programmable Feature)
Usage
Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to a different trunk or to another feature button.
Used to access an extension with one-touch. Every button is programmed to correspond to an extension. DSS buttons can also be reassigned to other features.
Used to access a preprogrammed feature with one-touch.
(no default)
Conditions
• Certain buttons are equipped with a light to show line or feature status.
Feature Guide 173
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.19.2 Flexible Buttons
Description
Flexible buttons are customised by either system or personal programming. The following types of flexible buttons are provided on PTs, DSS Consoles, Add-on Key Modules, and/or
PSs:
a)
Flexible CO buttons
b)
Flexible Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons
c)
Programmable Feature (PF) buttons
[Button Usage]
Button
Single-CO (S-CO)
Group-CO (G-CO)
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
One-touch Dialling
Incoming Call Distribution
(ICD) Group
Message
FWD/DND (External/
Internal/Both) *
Group FWD (External/
Internal/Both)
Used to access a preprogrammed party or feature with onetouch.
Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group for making or receiving calls.
Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication.
Used to perform the FWD or DND feature for the extension.
The feature is applied to trunk calls, intercom calls, or both.
Used to perform the FWD feature for a specified incoming call distribution group. The feature is applied to trunk calls, intercom calls, or both.
Used to enter an account code.
Account Code Entry
(Account)
Conference
Terminate
Usage
Used to access a specified trunk for making or receiving calls.
Used to access an idle trunk in a specified trunk group for making calls. Incoming calls from trunks in the assigned trunk group arrive at this button.
Used to access an idle trunk for making calls. Incoming calls from any trunk arrive at this button.
Used to access an extension with one-touch.
External Feature Access
(EFA)
Charge Reference
Call Park
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
Used to establish a multiparty conversation.
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up.
Used to send a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access their features.
Used to check the total call charge for your own extension.
Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset PBX parking zone.
Used to park a call in an idle PBX parking zone automatically.
174 Feature Guide
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
Call Log
Button
Log-in/Log-out *
Hurry-up
Wrap-up *
System Alarm
Time Service *
Usage
Used to show the incoming call information.
Used to switch between the log-in and log-out mode.
Used to redirect the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call distribution group to the overflow destination.
Used to switch the Wrap-up/Not Ready and Ready modes.
Used to confirm a PBX error.
Used to switch the assigned time modes: day, lunch, break or night. Also used to check the current time mode status.
Answer
Release
Used to answer an incoming call.
Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or to complete a Call Transfer.
Toll Restriction/Call Barring Used to change the TRS/Barring level of other extension users temporarily.
ISDN Service
Used to access an ISDN service.
Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR service.
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR) *
Connected Line
Identification Restriction
(COLR) *
Used to switch between the COLP and COLR service.
ISDN Hold
Headset
Used to transfer a call using the telephone company.
Used to turn on/off the headset mode while idle.
Used to switch between hands-free mode and headset modes during a conversation.
Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual) *
Used to switch between the Automatic Switching and Manual
Switching mode.
Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox.
Two-way Record
Two-way Transfer
One-touch Two-way
Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension.
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension with one-touch.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is leaving a message and, if desired, intercept the call.
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer
Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension.
*: One-touch Feature Setting Buttons: Pressing these buttons while on-hook changes the feature settings. The new mode will be displayed for a preprogrammed time period.
Conditions
• The Flexible DSS button lights of the KX-T7040 and KX-T7240 shows only "Off" or "Red
On". If the button is customised as a button which shows other light patterns, the other light patterns also show only as "Red On".
Feature Guide 175
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
User Manual References
User Manual
3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
176 Feature Guide
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.19.3 LED Indication
Description
The light (LED: Light Emitting Diode) of the Message/Ringer Lamp and following buttons (Line
Status Buttons and Corresponding Extension Status Button) show line conditions with a variety of light patterns.
Line Status Buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, INTERCOM, ICD Group
Corresponding Extension Status Button: DSS
1.
Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp
[DPT]
• Incoming call from a trunk: Red flashing
• Incoming call from another extension: Green flashing
• Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on
• No message(s) present (no incoming call): Off
[APT]
• Incoming call: Red flashing
• Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on
• No message(s) present (no incoming call): Off
Feature Guide 177
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
2.
Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons
Line Status
Button:
Light
Pattern
Off
Green on
Slow green flashing
Moderate green flashing
Rapid green flashing
Red on
Slow red flashing
Rapid red flashing
S-CO
Trunk Status
Intercom
Line Status
G-CO L-CO INTERCOM
Idle
This extension is using the line.
This extension is holding the line.
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group Line
Status
ICD Group
This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Hold or using the line for an Unattended Conference.
Incoming call/Privacy
Release
Incoming call for another extension/
Another extension is using the line/Another extension has the line on Exclusive
Hold.
Another extension is holding the line.
Other extensions are using all trunks in the trunk group.
–
–
–
Incoming call
Incoming call to the incoming call distribution group in Ring distribution method
–
–
–
This extension is logged out of the incoming call distribution group.
–
–
3.
Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button
Corresponding
Extension
Status Button
DSS
Light Pattern
Off
Red on
Rapid red flashing
Idle
Busy/Incoming call
*
1
/DND for trunk calls
Incoming call
*
2
*1
: Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is disabled.
*2
: Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is enabled.
178 Feature Guide
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
4.
Flashing Light Patterns
1 s
Slow Flashing
Moderate Flashing
Rapid Flashing
Conditions
• The incoming call shows on the buttons in the following priority:
ICD Group S-CO G-CO L-CO INTERCOM
• The light pattern of a DSS button for incoming call can be set to "Off" through system programming. In this case, the DSS button light will not indicate the status of the corresponding extension.
Feature Guide References
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
Feature Guide 179
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
1.19.4 Display Information
Description
A display PT shows the user the following information while making or receiving calls if they are available:
Display Item
The extension number and name of the calling or called extension, or incoming call distribution group
123: Tom Smith
Status of the called extension
Display Example
123: Busy
–
–
Door 02: 1st Door
– The number and name of the optional device
The dialled telephone number
1234567890
The received call information a) Caller’s name b) Caller’s number c) Trunk number/name d) Original Destination, if the call is forwarded e) DDI/DID/MSN name or number
Call charge fee during a trunk call.
ABC Company
12345678
Line 001: Sales
102:Mike
Panasonic
Condition
–
The first line message can be either (a), (c), or (e) at each extension through system programming.
Call duration during a trunk call.
12.35
The currency (
position of the currency symbol, and the decimal point (
programmable.
Line 001 11:02’28
–
Conditions
•
Multilingual Display
Each extension can select its display language through personal programming (Display
Language Selection).
•
Display Contrast
It is possible to adjust the display contrast through personal programming (Display
Contrast Selection). This is available only for DPTs.
•
Display Backlight
Each extension can select its display backlight on or off through personal programming
(Display Backlight Selection). This is available for the KX-T7633 and KX-T7636.
• Characters (name) or digits (number) exceeding the display’s size limitation are not displayed. In this case, information which have been programmed is hidden, but not altered.
180 Feature Guide
User Manual References
User Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
1.19 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features
Feature Guide 181
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Service Features
1.20.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
1.20.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Description
ISDN is a digital switching and transmission network. ISDN transmits voice, data, and image in digital format. ISDN lines, if available, can be connected to public line (trunk), private line
(QSIG), or ISDN terminal devices (extension).
1.
ISDN Interface and Configuration
Interface Type Description Port Mode
Basic Rate
Interface (BRI)
Provides two 64 kbps B channels for communication and one 16 kbps D channel for signalling (2B
+ D).
Trunk,
Extension
QSIG (Master,
Slave)
Configuration
Type
*
Point-to-Point/
Point-tomultipoint
Point-to-Point
Primary Rate
Interface (PRI)
Provides thirty or twenty-three 64 kbps B channels for communication and one 64 kbps
D channel for signalling (30B + D/
23B + D).
Trunk, QSIG
(Master, Slave),
Extension
Point-to-Point
* :
BRI Configuration [426] *For BRI only
Note
Point-to-Point (P-P):
One ISDN terminal device can be connected to one ISDN port.
Point-to-multipoint (P-MP):
A maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to one ISDN port.
182 Feature Guide
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
2.
ISDN Supplementary Service Table for Public Network
Direct Dialling In
(DDI)
Service
Multiple
Subscriber
Number (MSN)
Description
Directs a call with a DDI number to a preprogrammed destination. (P-P only)
One ISDN port can support a maximum of 10
MSNs for routing incoming calls. (P-MP only)
Calling Line
Identification
Presentation
(CLIP)
Connected Line
Identification
Presentation
(COLP)
Calling Line
Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Prevents the caller’s CLI being presented to the called party by the caller.
Connected Line
Identification
Restriction
(COLR)
Subaddressing
(SUB)
Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party.
You may add digits after the telephone number.
These digits will be passed to ISDN terminal device.
–
Details in
Sends the caller’s telephone number to the network when making a call. The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call.
Sends the telephone number of the answered party to the network when answering a call. The caller can see the number on his telephone display when the line is connected.
User-to-user
Signalling Type 1
(UUS-1)
Advice of Charge
(AOC)
Call Forwarding
(CF)—by ISDN
Transmits a specified volume of the data through the D channel between the ISDN terminal devices of different PBXs using UUS types 1.
–
The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company.
Forwards an incoming call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company.
Feature Guide 183
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
Service
Call Hold
(HOLD)—by ISDN
Call Transfer
(CT)—by ISDN
Three-party
Conference
(3PTY)—by ISDN
Malicious Call
Identification
(MCID)
Completion of
Calls to Busy
Subscriber
(CCBS)
Description
Puts one ISDN call on hold.
Details in
Transfers an ISDN call to an outside party. Call
Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement are available.
Establishes a three-party conference call using the ISDN service of the telephone company.
An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a malicious caller. Information on the malicious call will be received later on.
If an outside called party is busy, an extension can receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free.
3.
ISDN Centrex Service
An extension user can have access to the features of the ISDN Centrex Service of the telephone company (e.g., Call Transfer). This is used by putting the current ISDN call on hold by sending a flash/recall signal. This feature is enabled or disabled for each ISDN port.
4.
Private Networking Connection (QSIG)
Private networking with QSIG is possible using an ISDN line. The QSIG mode, Master or
Slave, can be enabled on an ISDN port basis.
5.
ISDN Extension (
An ISDN (BRI/PRI) port can be used for extension connection. While the extension connection is enabled, ISDN terminal devices (e.g., ISDN telephone, G4 fax machine, personal computer) or a behind PBX can be connected to the port.
When the ISDN port is in P-P configuration, one ISDN terminal device can be connected to the port. When the ISDN port is in P-MP configuration, a maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to the port. However, only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously.
Conditions
•
Overlap/En bloc
ISDN call dialling mode, Overlap or En bloc, can be selected for each ISDN port. When
"
Overlap
" is selected, the PBX sends each dialled digit individually. When "
En bloc
" is selected, the PBX sends all of dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises end of dialling as follows:
184 Feature Guide
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
– Dialling #, if programmed
– Dialling a preprogrammed telephone number
– Inter-digit timer expires.
• Some supplementary services are provided by the key protocol (
Service Access by Keypad Protocol).
•
Extension Number
An extension number can be assigned to each ISDN port.
•
Network Type
Each ISDN port can be set to the requirements of each country/area (
•
L1 Active Mode and L2 Data Link Mode
The active mode of Layer 1 (L1) (
BRI Layer 1 Active Mode [424] *For BRI only) and the
data link mode of Layer 2 (L2) (
BRI Layer 2 Active Mode [425] *For BRI only) can be
selected individually, Permanent or Call by Call, on an ISDN port basis.
•
TEI Assignment Mode
The Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) assignment mode can be selected on an ISDN port basis (
BRI TEI Mode [427] *For BRI only).
•
Bearer Mode
The bearer mode can be assigned on an extension basis.
•
Automatic ISDN Configuration
ISDN (BRI) port configuration can be set automatically through system programming.
The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN (BRI) port:
– L1 Active Mode
– L2 Data Link Mode
– Access Mode (Point-to-Point/Point-to-Multipoint)
– TEI Assignment Mode (Fix 00–63/Automatic)
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 185
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
Description
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP):
The PBX can send a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when an extension user makes a call. The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call.
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP):
The PBX sends a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when the extension user answers an incoming call. The caller can see the number of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered.
These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications:
ETS 300 092 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) supplementary service.
ETS 300 097 Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) supplementary service.
[CLIP Example]
1) Dials
"87654321".
2) "12345678" is displayed.
PBX
ISDN
Caller
(CLIP/COLP No.: 12345678)
Called party
(CLIP/COLP No.: 87654321)
[COLP Example]
1) Dials
"111222333".
Caller
3) "111222444" is displayed.
ISDN
PBX
Called party
(CLIP/COLP No.:
111222333)
FWD, IRNA, etc.
Answering party
(CLIP/COLP No.:
111222444)
2) Answers the call.
186 Feature Guide
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
CLIP/COLP Number:
The telephone numbers sent to the network for CLIP/COLP can be assigned as follows:
• CLIP/COLP number for each ISDN port (subscriber’s number) (
• CLIP/COLP number for each extension (
• CLIP/COLP number for each incoming call distribution group
Each extension can select either the CLIP/COLP number for the ISDN port or the extension to be used. The CLIP/COLP number for the incoming call distribution group is used when making a call by pressing the ICD Group button or receiving a call which arrives at the ICD Group button.
Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR):
It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its telephone number to the network by pressing the CLIR button, COLR button, or entering the feature number.
These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications:
ETS 300 093 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) supplementary service.
ETS 300 098 Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) supplementary service.
Conditions
• The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.
• The CLIP/COLP number for the connected ISDN port can be used for the ISDN terminal devices which cannot be assigned their own CLIP/COLP number, such as a doorphone.
•
COLP/CLIR/COLR Assignment for Each Port
Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX.
• CLIR Button and COLR Button
It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button, and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button. A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button.
• The CLIP/COLP number must match the telephone number provided by the telephone company. Otherwise it will be ignored or replaced by another number.
• When using a private network, the extension number assigned for each extension through system programming (
Extension Number [003]) is sent for CLIP/COLP. (
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected
Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG)
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.7.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone
(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])
1.7.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone
(Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR])
1.7.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling
Line Identification Restriction [CLIR])
Feature Guide 187
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
Description
The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company.
There are the following types:
Type
Advice of Charge During Call
(AOC-D)
Advice of Charge
At End of Call (AOC-E)
Description
AOC is received during the call and when the call is completed.
AOC is received when the call is completed.
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 182 Advice of Charge (AOC) supplementary service Digital
Subscriber Signalling System No. One (DSS1) protocol.
Conditions
• A DPT user can see the call charge information on the display during the call.
•
Budget Management
If the amount of call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit, an extension user cannot make further calls. (
•
AOC for ISDN extension
An ISDN extension also receives AOC.
188 Feature Guide
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
Description
An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature, when the call is received through an ISDN line.
Extension users can set the forward destination to the network on an MSN basis. The setting must have been done beforehand to use this feature. There are the following types:
Type Description
Call Forwarding—
Unconditional (CFU)
Incoming calls are forwarded unconditionally.
Call Forwarding—
Busy (CFB)
An incoming call is forwarded when the destination on the PBX is busy.
Call Forwarding—No
Reply (CFNR)
An incoming call is forwarded when the destination on the PBX does not answer within a preprogrammed time period.
When the CFB or CFNR has been set, the network determines to forward the incoming call to the preprogrammed destination after the call reached the PBX once. When the CFU has been set, the network forwards the call directly to the preprogrammed destination.
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service.
[Example]
<FWD> <Call Forwarding (CF) by ISDN (P-MP)>
ISDN
PBX
ISDN
MSN:123-4567
CFU
Destination: 01-23-4567
MSN: 123-4567
987-6543
PBX
Outside Caller
Dials "123-4567".
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Extn. 1011
(MSN: 123-4567
Forward Destination
of Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567)
Outside Caller
Dials "123-4567".
Extn. 1011
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Feature Guide 189
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
Conditions
• The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.
• The feature requires the MSN service. (
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)
• COS programming determines the extensions that are able to use this feature.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.5.1 Forwarding Calls
190 Feature Guide
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
Description
An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature, when the call is received through an ISDN line.
The network directly forwards the call to the destination which the extension user has set on the PBX as the forward destination of trunk calls; the network is instructed by the PBX. This feature is available only when the call is received through an ISDN port which supports this feature.
Call Forwarding—Unconditional (CFU), Call Forwarding—Busy (CFB), and Call Forwarding—
No Reply (CFNR) are applied to this feature.
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service.
[Example]
<FWD> <Call Forwarding (CF) by ISDN (P-P)>
ISDN ISDN
Outside Caller
Dials "01-45-6789".
PBX
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Outside Caller
Dials "01-45-6789".
CF Request to 01-23-4567
PBX
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Extn. 1011
(DDI No.: 01-45-6789
Forward Destination
of Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567)
Extn. 1011
(DDI No.: 01-45-6789
Forward Destination
of Trunk Calls: 01-23-4567)
Conditions
• The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.
• This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX.
• This feature is available when the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call.
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 191
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
User Manual References
User Manual
1.5.1 Forwarding Calls
192 Feature Guide
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN
Description
An ISDN call can be put on hold using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature. This can be a part of a Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN (
(CT)—by ISDN) and Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN (
Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN). This feature allows an ISDN call to be held, and a call to be
made to another outside party using only one communication channel of ISDN. A PT user can easily use this feature by pressing the ISDN Hold button.
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 141 Call Hold (HOLD) supplementary service.
Conditions
•
ISDN Hold Button
A flexible button can be customised as the ISDN Hold button.
• The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.
• The TRS/Barring feature is applied when making a call after activating this feature. (
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))
• ARS cannot be applied to the call dialled after activating this feature. (
• It is impossible to seize any other trunk during this feature.
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 193
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN
Description
An ISDN call can be transferred to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature, without occupying a second ISDN line.
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 369 Explicit Call Transfer (ECT) supplementary service.
Conditions
• The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.
• This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis.
• If an ISDN port is in P-P configuration, this feature can be used only when the network supports the "explicit linkage" option.
• Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible. (
• The call charges after completing this feature will not be recorded by the PBX.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
194 Feature Guide
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
Description
During a conversation using an ISDN line, an extension user can add another party and establish a three-party conference call using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX feature.
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 188 Three-Party (3PTY) supplementary service.
Conditions
• The availability of this feature is depending on the contract with the telephone company.
• This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.5 Multiple Party Conversation
Feature Guide 195
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)
Description
An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a malicious caller during a call or while hearing reorder tone after the caller hangs up. Information on the malicious call will be received later on.
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 130 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) supplementary service.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.3.6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties (Malicious Call Identification [MCID])
196 Feature Guide
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
Description
If the called party is busy and the call has been made using an ISDN line, an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free. When the user answers the callback ringing, that party’s number is automatically dialled.
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 359 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) supplementary service.
Conditions
• This feature is available under the following conditions:
a)
The caller’s PBX is capable of using CCBS and the service is provided by the network.
b)
The called party’s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS.
• To receive and send CCBS, receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN port basis through system programming.
• An extension user can set only one CCBS. The last setting is effective.
• The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds.
• If an extension user makes a call using the CCBS feature, the preassigned CLIP number for the extension will be used even though the extension has set CLIR or the extension has used the CLIP for the incoming call distribution group by pressing the ICD Group button when the CCBS has set. (
1.20.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation
• After using the CCBS feature, using Last Number Redial will not retrieve the number dialled by CCBS. (
• An extension user that has set the CCBS feature cannot receive callback ringing while the extension is holding a call.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
Feature Guide 197
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20.1.11 ISDN Extension
Description
An ISDN (BRI/PRI) port can be used for either trunk or extension connection. When extension connection is enabled, ISDN terminal devices (e.g., ISDN telephone, G4 fax machine, personal computer) or a behind PBX can be connected to the port.
If the ISDN port is in point-to-point (P-P) configuration, one terminal device can be connected to the port. If the ISDN port is in point-to-multipoint (P-MP) configuration, a maximum of eight terminal devices can be connected to the port. However, only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously.
Individual terminal devices on a behind PBX can be addressed with Multiple Subscriber
Number (MSN). The MSN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit, 0 through 9 or 00 through 99.
[Example]
PBX
ISDN Port for
EXTN. (P-MP)
Extn. No.: 1234
ISDN Port for
EXTN. (P-MP)
(1234)
Extn. No.: 13X (MSN)
(1234)
Idle Extension
Hunting is available.
...
...
...
...
(1234)
(131) (132)
ISDN Port for
EXTN. (P-P/P-MP)
Extn. No.: 14XX (MSN)
ISDN Port for
EXTN. (P-P/P-MP)
Behind
PBX
Extn. No.: 15XX
(MSN)
(139)
...
(1400) (1401)
...
(1499)
1234:
Up to eight terminals can be connected to the port and receive a call simultaneously.
131–139:
Up to eight terminals can be connected to the port.
130:
All terminals receive a call simultaneously.
1400–1499:
Each terminal receives a call.
(Use the DDI/MSN feature of the behind PBX.)
Conditions
•
Subaddressing
Subaddressing is possible between ISDN terminal devices. The subaddress goes through the PBX to the ISDN terminal devices directly.
• Call Transfer (PBX feature) is available only for ISDN extensions in P-MP configuration.
(
198 Feature Guide
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group (
Distribution Group Features) or idle extension hunting group (
Hunting). In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
• If the last digit of the MSN is "0", all terminal devices on the same ISDN port receive the call simultaneously, if the specification of each terminal device is available. To use the
MSN whose last digit is "0" as an individual MSN, system programming is required for each ISDN port.
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
Feature Guide 199
1.20 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features
1.20.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol
Description
ISDN provides some supplementary services by key protocol, and they may require a service access code to be dialled.
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 122 Generic keypad protocol for the support of supplementary service
(ISDN Service Access).
Conditions
•
ISDN Service Button
A flexible button can be customised as an ISDN Service button. A service access code can also be assigned on this button for a quick operation.
• This feature is not available to an SLT.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.5 Accessing the ISDN Service (ISDN Service Access)
200 Feature Guide
1.21 E1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
1.21 E1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200 only)
1.21.1 E1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
Description
The E1 line carries thirty 64 kbps-voice channels at 2.048 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line. Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).
1.
Channel Type
[DR2 (Digital System R2)/E & M-C (Continuous E & M)/E & M-P (Pulsed E & M)]
The E1 card supports three different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense. One of the three channel types can be assigned to one of the 30 channels of the
E1 card individually according to tariffs and customer needs.
2.
E1 Features
The following table shows the features available for each channel type:
[Feature Table]
Channel Type (1) TIE (2) DID (3) DIL (4) ANI
(5) Call Charge
Information
DR2
*1
*2
E & M-C
E & M-P
*2
: Available
*1 :
Receiving Dial Mode should be MFC-R2.
*2 :
Available when this PBX is connected to the KX-TDA100, KX-TDA200, or KX-
TD500.
Feature Guide 201
1.21 E1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
[Explanation]
Number in the table
(1)
Feature Description
TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature. (
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Direct Inward
Dialling (DID)
Direct In Line
(DIL)
Automatic
Number
Identification
(ANI)
Call Charge
Information
Refer to the DID feature. (
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI))
Refer to the DIL feature. (
Outgoing ANI:
Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line. The sending method is the same as ISDN CLIP service. (
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/
Incoming ANI:
Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line.
When the ANI number is received, it can be treated the same as a Caller ID number. (
The call charge meter pulses can be received during a conversation. (
Conditions
• If an E1 line is used as a trunk, the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company.
• If "
MFC-R2
" is selected as the Dial Mode, the PBX always sends a dial tone, instead of the telephone company, when making a trunk call using E1 line.
202 Feature Guide
1.22 T1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
1.22 T1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200 only)
1.22.1 T1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
Description
The T1 line carries twenty-four 64 kbps-voice channels at 1.5 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line. Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).
1.
Channel Type
[LCOT/GCOT/DID/TIE/OPX]
The T1 card supports five different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense. One of the five channel types can be assigned to one of the 24 channels of the
T1 card individually according to tariffs and customer needs.
2.
T1 Features
The following table shows the features available for each channel type:
[Feature Table]
Channel Type (1) TIE (2) DID (3) DIL (4) OPX (5) ANI
LCOT
GCOT
DID
TIE (E & M)
OPX
: Available
[Explanation]
Number in the Table
(1)
(2)
Feature Description
TIE Line
Service
Refer to the TIE Line Service feature. (
Direct Inward
Dialling (DID)
Refer to the DID feature. (
Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI))
(3) Direct In Line
(DIL)
Refer to the DIL feature. (
Feature Guide 203
1.22 T1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
Number in the Table
(4)
Feature
Off Premise
Extension
(OPX)
Description
An SLT which is installed off site can perform as if it were installed locally. The SLT makes and receives a call through the PBX. An extension number can be given to the OPX, and extension data such as COS is also applied.
[Example]
Telephone Company
SLT
T1 LCOT T1 OPX
T1 Card
PBX
Extn.103
(5)
Dials "103".
Extn.101
Extn.102
Automatic
Number
Identification
(ANI)
Receives the caller’s number from the T1 line.
When the ANI number is received, it can be treated the same as a Caller ID number. (
Conditions
• If a T1 line is used as a trunk, the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company.
204 Feature Guide
1.23 Voice Mail Features
1.23 Voice Mail Features
1.23.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Description
A VPS can be connected to extension ports on the PBX. The extension ports make a group, called a VM group. This group has a floating extension number. The VM group can be the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. When receiving a call, the VPS can greet the caller offering them the option to leave a message or dial a number to reach the desired party. The VPS can record the message for each extension and leave notification on the corresponding extension, if the called extension is not able to answer calls.
1.
VM Group Type
Type
VM (DTMF) Group
VM (DPT) Group
Description
A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration features. A maximum of two VM (DTMF) groups can be assigned.
A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration features.
With the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
• A maximum of two VM (DPT) groups can be assigned.
• One Panasonic KX-TVS/KX-TVP system can be in only one group.
• A maximum of 12 ports (24 channels) of the VPS can form each group.
With the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30:
• One VM (DPT) group can be assigned.
• A maximum of 4 ports (8 channels) of the VPS can form a group.
[Example]
DPT
Port
SLT
Port
PBX
VM (DPT) Group
Floating extn. no. 100
Extn.101 Extn.102 Extn.103 Extn.104
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
VM (DTMF) Group
Floating extn. no. 250
Extn.117 Extn.118 Extn.119 Extn.120
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
VPS
(DPT [Digital] Integration)
VPS
(DTMF Integration)
Feature Guide 205
1.23 Voice Mail Features
VM (DTMF) Group Assignment:
The VPS is connected to the SLT ports of the PBX. These SLT ports, as well as VM
(DTMF) Group settings, must be configured to allow DTMF Integration, as shown in the following [Programming Example of Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM
(DTMF) Group].
VM (DPT) Group Assignment:
The VPS is connected to the DPT ports of the PBX. These DPT ports, as well as VM (DPT) group settings, must be configured to allow DPT (Digital) Integration, as shown in the following [Programming Example of Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM
(DPT) Group].
*
3
3
:
6
6
5
:
4
4
:
5
[Programming Example of Extension Port]
Slot
1
2
:
1
2
:
1
2
1
2
:
Port
DPT
DPT
:
S-Hybrid
S-Hybrid
:
SLT
SLT
:
SLT
SLT
Port Type Extn. No.
101
102
:
201
202
:
301
302
:
401
402
Type*
VM (DPT)
VM (DPT)
:
VM (DPT)
VM (DPT)
:
Not assignable
Not assignable
:
Not assignable
Not assignable
DPT Property
Unit No.
of VPS
1
1
:
2
2
:
Not assignable
Not assignable
:
Not assignable
Not assignable
Port No.
of VPS
1
2
:
1
2
:
Not assignable
Not assignable
:
Not assignable
Not assignable
:
Terminal Device Assignment [601]
[Programming Example of VM (DTMF) Group]
VM (DTMF)
Group No.
1
2
Floating
Extension
No.
300
400
Group
Name
Company C
Company D
Service
Mode
AA
VM
VM (DPT)
Group 1
VM (DPT)
Group 2
VM (DTMF)
Group 1
VM (DTMF)
Group 2
Extension No. of
Port Connected to
VPS Port
1
301
2
302
…
…
401 402 …
[Programming Example of VM (DPT) Group]
VM (DPT) Group No.
1
2
Floating Extension No.
100
200
*
*
:
VM Group Floating Extension Number [660]
Group Name
Company A
Company B
2.
Incoming Calls to VM Group
When incoming calls are received at the floating extension number of the VM group, calls will hunt starting at the lowest VM port number. In this case, the FWD and DND settings
(
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)) for each extension port are
disregarded.
It is programmable whether the calls queue when all extension ports in the group are busy through system programming. If the queuing is disabled through system programming, the
206 Feature Guide
1.23 Voice Mail Features
call will be redirected to the destination, assigned on the trunk group which receives the call, by the Intercept Routing feature.
Conditions
[General]
• It is possible to call an extension (extension port) in a VM group directly. If the calls are routed directly to the extension in the group, it is possible to enable some features (e.g.,
FWD, Idle Extension Hunting) on the extension in the group.
The Voice Mail DTMF/DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., command transmit) is also available on the extension.
•
One-touch Voice Mail Feature Access
It is possible to assign a One-touch Dialling button for direct access to a Voice Mail feature.
(
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling) For example, to access a mailbox (mailbox number 123)
of the VPS (extension number 165) directly, assign "165#6123" to a One-touch Dialling button. When pressing this button, the outgoing message (OGM) of the mailbox will be heard.
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
• All ports in a VM (DPT) group must be connected to a single DHLC or DLC card.
[KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30]
• All ports in a VM (DPT) group must be connected to either the same DLC card, or to the preinstalled Super Hybrid ports.
Feature Guide References
1.23.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Feature Guide 207
1.23 Voice Mail Features
1.23.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Description
The PBX and the VPS connected to the PBX can transmit commands using DTMF signals to each other. The PBX sends preprogrammed commands using DTMF to the VPS automatically to change the answering service between Voice Mail (VM) service mode and Automated
Attendant (AA) service mode or to inform the extension status (e.g., busy). The VPS sends the commands to the PBX like an SLT.
The following answering services and features are available:
1.
Voice Mail (VM) Service Mode
When a caller reaches the VPS, the VPS greets and guides the caller to leave a voice message for a specified mailbox.
[Example]
The VPS sends the message to the caller, "Thank you for calling Panasonic. Please enter the mailbox number of the person you wish to leave your message for."
The caller dials the mailbox number. Then, the dialled number is sent to the VPS via the
PBX.
The VPS sends the personal greeting to the caller, "You have reached Mike's voice mail.
I am sorry I cannot take your call right now. Please leave a message and I will call you back."
The caller leaves a message.
If the call reroutes to the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) Group or the extension in the VM (DTMF) group by such as the FWD feature, when the VPS answers the call, the PBX will dial the mailbox number of the corresponding group or extension and any other digits required to the VPS automatically using the caller-dialled number (Follow on ID). In this case, the caller can reach a mailbox without knowing the mailbox number.
[Available Features for Follow on ID] a)
FWD to a Mailbox
b)
Intercept Routing to a Mailbox
c)
Call Transfer to a Mailbox
d)
Listening to a Message in a Mailbox
2.
Automated Attendant (AA) Service Mode
The VPS greets and guides the caller to the desired extension directly without operator assistance.
3.
VM AA Service, AA VM Service
It is possible to switch the service mode assigned on the VPS port, from the VM service to AA service or vice versa.
System Explanation
1.
Service Mode Assignment
Assign the service mode, VM service or AA service, to the VM (DTMF) group to
208 Feature Guide
1.23 Voice Mail Features
correspond with the assignment of the VPS.
2.
DTMF Command Assignment
Assign the DTMF command to suit the VPS settings.
Switching to VM
Switching to AA
Recording message
Listening message
Command (Default)
#6
#8
H
H
Note: H = Mailbox Number
3.
VM Service a)
FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS
The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a call is forwarded from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number.
[FWD to the VPS Sequence Selection]
If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, any incoming call will be forwarded to the
VPS.
It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are forwarded so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox.
This can be performed by selecting "
AA
" through system programming.
Parameter
Answer by
Mailbox
(Default)
AA
None
Transmitted Command
In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode
Switching to VM command +
Recording message command
(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])
Recording message command
(H [H = Mailbox No.])
Switching to AA command (#8) Switching to AA command (#8)
(DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)
b)
Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS
The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a trunk call is intercepted from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number.
[Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Selection]
If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS.
It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are intercepted so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be performed by selecting "
AA
" through system programming.
Feature Guide 209
1.23 Voice Mail Features
Parameter
Transmitted Command
In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode
Answer by
Mailbox
AA
Switching to VM command +
Recording message command
(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])
Recording message command
(H [H = Mailbox No.])
Switching to AA command (#8) Switching to AA command (#8)
None (Default) (DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)
[Example of a) & b)]
Trunk Call
Operator
Transfer
PBX
Extn. 102
Sent "#6" + "102".
mailbox number
Switching to VM command
FWD, Intercept
VPS (In AA service mode)
VM Port 1 VM Port 2
VM (DTMF)
Group
VM Port X
VM Port 3
c)
Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS
An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension. The extension user should use the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the
VPS. When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension with the required command (after the VPS answers the call).
Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number.
210 Feature Guide
1.23 Voice Mail Features
[Performance of Pressing the VM Transfer Button and Entering an Extension
Number]
Transmitted Command
In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode
Switching to VM command +
Recording message command
(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])
Recording message command
(H [H = Mailbox No.])
[Example]
Trunk Call
PBX
Sent "#6" + "103".
mailbox number
Switching to VM command
Transfer with VM Transfer button + extension number (103)
Extension
(Operator)
VPS (In AA service mode)
VM Port 1 VM Port 2
VM (DTMF)
Group
VM Port X
VM Port 3
d)
Listening to a Recorded Message
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning on the Message button light) on the corresponding telephone as notification.
(
1.18.1 Message Waiting) Thereby, the VPS notifies the extension user that there
is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the Message button light turns on, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox number. It is programmable whether the
PBX or the VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the Message button light). When the PBX is selected, the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has accessed the VPS. When the VPS is selected, the
Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has listened to messages stored in his mailbox.
Feature Guide 211
1.23 Voice Mail Features
[Performance of Pressing the MESSAGE Button]
Transmitted Command
In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode
Switching to VM command +
Listening message command
(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])
Listening message command
( H [H = Mailbox No.])
[Example]
PBX
Sent "#6" + " ", "102".
Listening message command, mailbox number
Switching to VM command
Pressing the
MESSAGE button
Extn. 102
VPS (In AA service mode)
Mailbox for
Extn. 102
4.
AA Service
If the VPS transfers the call using the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called destination with the preprogrammed DTMF status signal so that the VPS can confirm the status of the extension without listening to the system tones (e.g., ringback tone).
Assign the DTMF status signal to suit the VPS settings.
[The DTMF Status Signal and Condition]
Status
RBT (ringback tone)
Condition
The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension.
BT (busy tone) The called extension is busy.
ROT (reorder tone) The dialled number is invalid.
DND (DND tone) The called extension has set DND. (
Answer The called extension has answered the call.
FWD VM RBT
(FWD to Voice Mail ringback tone)
The called extension has set FWD to
VPS and the PBX is calling another port of the VPS.
FWD VM BT (FWD to Voice Mail busy tone)
The called extension has set FWD to
VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.
Default Command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
212 Feature Guide
1.23 Voice Mail Features
Status
FWD EXT RBT
(FWD to extension ringback tone)
Condition
The PBX is calling an extension other than the one dialled. FWD or Idle
Extension Hunting (
Extension Hunting) may be assigned by
the called extension.
Confirm
(confirmation tone)
The PBX receives confirmation that the feature has been successfully set or cancelled (e.g., Message Waiting) on the extension.
Disconnect The caller has hung up.
Default Command
8
9
#9
[Example]
PBX
2
Transfer
1
Busy
Extn.
102
3
Sent "2".
Busy
Status
4
VPS
1
An incoming call reaches the VPS. The VPS greets the caller: "Thank you for calling
Panasonic. If you know the extension number of the person you wish… ".
2
The caller dials the extension number (extn.
102). The VPS will transfer the call to the extension via the PBX.
3
If the extension is not available, the PBX sends DTMF status signal of the extension
(busy status) to the VPS.
4
The VPS receives the DTMF status signal and send the appropriate message to the caller: "Sorry. The extension is busy. Would you like to leave a message… ".
Conditions
•
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter.
• It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS answers the call and the
PBX sends the Follow on ID to the VPS.
• It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS transfers the call using the
AA service to the PBX and the PBX sends the DTMF status signal to the VPS.
• It is possible to select whether the mailbox number is the same as the extension number, or the mailbox number is programmable for each extension number and incoming call distribution group (Mailbox Access ID).
• The Inter-digit time for the DTMF command and for DTMF status signal is programmable.
• Data Line Security is set automatically on the extensions in the VM (DTMF) group to achieve proper recording. (
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 213
1.23 Voice Mail Features
User Manual References
User Manual
1.9.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
214 Feature Guide
1.23 Voice Mail Features
1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Description
A Panasonic VPS that supports DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., the KX-TVP200) can be connected to this PBX in a tightly integrated fashion.
DPT (Digital) Integration features can be used when the VPS is connected through DPT ports of the PBX.
Feature Explanation
1.
Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup
The PBX informs the VPS of its extension numbers and the floating extension numbers of the incoming call distribution groups so that the VPS can create mailboxes with this data automatically.
2.
FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS
If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, incoming calls are forwarded to the VPS. (
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) The PBX sends a mailbox number of the forwarding
extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number.
3.
Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS
If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS. (
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing) If the "
Intercept to Mailbox
" setting is enabled through system programming, the PBX sends the mailbox number of the intercepted extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number.
4.
Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS
An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension. (
1.11.1 Call Transfer) The extension
user should use the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS. When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension number with the required command (after the VPS answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number.
5.
Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS
If a call is transferred to an extension via the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS and the call is not answered within a preprogrammed Transfer Recall time (
Recall Time [201]), the PBX sends the mailbox number of the transfer destination
extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number. The "
Transfer Recall to Mailbox
" setting should be enabled through system programming to use this feature.
6.
Listening to a Recorded Message (Direct Mailbox Access)
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning on the Message button light) on the corresponding telephone as notification. (
Message Waiting) Thereby, the VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message
waiting in his mailbox. When the Message button light turns on, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox.
When the extension user dials an extension number of the VM (DPT) extension port or the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group from his extension, he can listen to the
Feature Guide 215
1.23 Voice Mail Features
messages stored in his mailbox without dialling his mailbox number (Direct Mailbox
Access). It is possible to disable this feature by COS programming on the VPS.
7.
VPS Trunk Service & Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call*
Multiple tenants can share a single VPS; each tenant does not require a dedicated VPS port. If the destination of the incoming trunk call is a VM (DPT) group, the PBX sends the
VPS trunk group number and time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the tenant (
Time Service) assigned for the call to the VPS. Therefore the VPS can send the assigned
message (company greeting) to the caller. Corresponding VPS trunk group number and tenant number are determined by the setting of the incoming trunk call as follows:
a)
DIL/TIE: the setting of each trunk port (
1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL), 1.28.1 TIE
b)
DID/DDI: the setting of each location number for DID/DDI (
Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI))
c)
MSN: the setting of each MSN (
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)
[Example]
For DID Calls:
Each location number can have its VPS trunk group number (message number) and tenant number.
[DID Programming Example]
Location
No.
DID No.
DID Destination
Day Lunch Break Night
DID Name
VPS Trunk
Group No.
Tenant
No.
0001
0002
:
123-4567 105
123-2468
:
102
:
100
100
:
105
102
:
100
100
:
John White
Tom Smith
:
1
2
:
1
3
:
216 Feature Guide
[VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment]
Trunk Group No.
1
2
:
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
:
Company Greeting No.
Incoming Call Service
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
:
Custom Service 11
Custom Service 29
Custom Service 31
Custom Service 12
Custom Service 21
Custom Service 15
Custom Service 42
Custom Service 30
:
Explanation:
A DID call reaches a VM (DPT) group directly or by the Intercept Routing feature.
According to the [DID Programming Example] and [VPS Programming—Programming
Example of Trunk Group Assignment], a caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS.
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
Tenant 1
(Company A)
1.23 Voice Mail Features
Time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DID destination and company greeting number.
Trunk Call
Trunk Call
123-4567
123-2468
Sends the following information:
· VPS Trunk Group: 1
· Time mode: Day
PBX
Intercept
Sends the following information:
· VPS Trunk Group: 2
· Time mode: Night
Tenant 3
(Company B)
VPS
(Floating Extn. No.100)
Extn. 105 Extn. 102
8.
Caller’s Identification Notification to the VPS
When receiving a trunk call, the PBX sends the caller’s identification number/name to the
VPS.
9.
DID Number Notification to the VPS
When receiving a trunk call with a DDI/DID number or an MSN, the PBX sends the DDI/
DID number or MSN to the VPS. The number will be sent to the VPS even if the call reaches the VPS after redirection by, for example, the Intercept Routing feature.
10.
Status Notification to the VPS
After the call is redirected by the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the redirected extension (e.g., busy) to the VPS.
11.
Paging by the VPS
The VPS can perform the Paging feature using the recorded message. (
12.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
PT and PS users can monitor his own mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer the call by pressing the LCS button. When the caller is leaving a message in the mailbox, monitoring can be carried out in two ways: each PT user can choose which through personal programming (Live Call Screening Mode Set). PS users cannot choose the way: only Private mode is available for them.
Hands-free mode: The user can monitor the call automatically through the built-in speaker.
Private mode: The user will hear an alarm tone. To monitor the call, the user goes offhook with the handset, MONITOR button, or SP-PHONE button. However, PS users cannot monitor the call with the speakerphone.
Feature Guide 217
1.23 Voice Mail Features
13.
Two-way Recording into the VPS
A PT user can record a conversation into his own mailbox or another mailbox, while talking on the phone.
Use the Two-way Record button to record into his own mailbox. Use the Two-way Transfer button to record into someone else’s mailbox.
Note
When you record Two-way telephone conversations, you should inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded.
14.
VPS Data Control by the PBX*
The data of date and time is controlled by the PBX.
15.
Remote PBX Data Control by the VPS*
The FWD of an extension can be controlled by the VPS.
*: This feature may not be supported depending on the software version of the VPS.
Conditions
[General]
•
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter.
[Live Call Screening (LCS)]
• If an SLT is connected in parallel to a PT, and if LCS is activated for the PT in Private mode, both the PT and SLT can be used to monitor calls while in idle status. The SLT will ring to indicate a message is being recorded. The call can be monitored with the SLT by going off-hook. To intercept the call, press Flash/Recall button or flash the hookswitch. (
•
LCS Button
A flexible button can be customised as the LCS button.
•
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
To prevent unauthorised monitoring, it is recommended the LCS user assign an extension
PIN. This PIN will be required when setting LCS. (
Identification Number (PIN)) If the user forgets the PIN, it can be cleared by an extension
assigned as the manager.
• Each extension can be programmed to either end recording or continue recording the conversation after the call is intercepted, through personal programming (LCS Mode Set
[After Answering]).
• To use the LCS feature on a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, LCS can only be turned on or off from the wired telephone. In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, setting LCS on/off from the PS has no effect. (
1.24.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
[Two-way Recording into the VPS]
•
Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Two-way Record or the Two-way Transfer button. An extension number can be assigned to the Two-way Transfer button so that it can be used as a one-touch record button for the mailbox of the specified extension. (One-
touch Two-way Transfer Button).
218 Feature Guide
1.23 Voice Mail Features
• When all of the VPS ports are busy:
a)
Pressing the Two-way Record button sends an alarm tone
b)
Pressing the Two-way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends an alarm tone.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.9.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
3.2.2 Manager Programming
Feature Guide 219
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features
1.24.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
Description
This PBX supports the connection of a PS (e.g., KX-TD7590, KX-TD7690). It is possible to use the PBX features using the PS like a PT.
Conditions
• The PS registration is required through the system programming (
[690]). To avoid unexpected registration to another PBX, the Personal Identification
Number (PIN) for the PBX is necessary to register a PS (
Number (PIN) for PS Registration [692]). The registration can be cancelled ( PS
•
Handover
Even if a PS user moves during a conversation, the PS will automatically switch between cells without disconnecting the call (Handover).
Handover is available in any of the following cases:
a)
During a conversation with an extension or outside party.
b)
While a call is ringing at the PS.
c)
While the PS is in idle status.
PBX
CS
Interface
CS
Handover:
Calls will not be disconnected.
CS
On the contrary, Handover is not available in one of the following cases:
a)
When the new (Handover) CS is busy.
b)
When there is no CS within range.
c)
While the Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (
Mail DPT (Digital) Integration).
d)
While the PS user is paging other extensions (
e)
During a doorphone call (
f)
While the PS user is dialling digits to make a trunk call.
g)
During a conversation with an extension using PC Console or PC Phone, to which the conversation is being recorded.
• When a caller has dialled the extension number of a PS but the CS is busy, the caller hears a busy tone.
220 Feature Guide
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
2.9 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations — KX-TDA30
6.8 Connection of 2.4 GHz Portable Stations — KX-TDA30
Feature Guide 221
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features
1.24.2 PS Ring Group
Description
PS ring group is a group of PS extensions which receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple groups.
[Programming Example]
PS Ring
Group 01
Floating Extn. No.
Group Name
301
Sales 1
Incoming Trunk Call
Information Display
Called Party’s Name/
Number
PS01
PS02
PS03
PS04
PS05
PS06
PS07
:
:
: Constituent
PS Ring
Group 02
302
Sales 2
Caller’s Name/
Number
:
PS Ring
Group 03
303
Sales 3
Caller’s Name/
Number
:
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
:
· ·
· ·
· ·
· ·
PS Ring Group 1
(Floating Extn. No. 301
Name: Sales 1)
PS Ring Group 2
(Floating Extn. No. 302
Name: Sales 2)
PS01
PS02
PS03
PS04
PS05
PS06
Conditions
•
PS Ring Group
A maximum of 32 groups can be created.
•
Available PS
The KX-TD7580, KX-TD7590, KX-TCA155, KX-TCA255, KX-TD7680, and KX-TD7690 can join PS ring groups.
• Incoming trunk call information is shown on a PS display when a trunk call arrives at a PS ring group which the PS joins. The display information can be selected on a PS ring group
222 Feature Guide
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features
basis through system programming: Called Party’s Name/Number or Caller’s Name/
Number.
•
Calling Multiple PSs Simultaneously
There are two methods to call multiple PSs simultaneously using the floating extension number assigned to the following groups:
Method Assignment Merit Demerit Details in
Incoming
Call
Distribution
Group
Assign all desired
PSs to one incoming call distribution group
(
set the group call distribution method for the group to
"Ring".
All PS users in the group can use the
Log-in/Log-out feature, Wrap-up feature, and ICD
Group button for the group.
The CS may often be busy as each
PS in the group uses one channel when a call arrives at the group.
PS Ring
Group
Assign all desired
PSs to one PS ring group.
Only one channel is used when a call arrives at the group.
PS users in the group cannot use the Log-in/Logout and Wrap-up features.
–
• When a PS joins a PS ring group, the following personal settings are disregarded:
a)
When the PS ring group is called:
– Delayed Ringing
– Display information when the incoming calls arrive;
The settings (e.g., display priority) are disregarded.
– The setting which is assigned on the PS (e.g., FWD)
– The status of the PS (e.g., busy)
b)
Log-in/log-out setting (from the PS ring group/from the incoming call distribution group which the PS ring group belongs to). (
Note
Log-in/log-out setting of the PS ring group from the incoming call distribution group is also disregarded.
PS Ring Group
Log-out
Log-in
Feature Guide 223
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features
PS Ring
Group
Log-out
Incoming Call
Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
Log-in
Log-out
Log-in
• When the PS ring group is called using the floating extension number, the group becomes busy to other callers using the floating extension number. However, the individual group members may be called directly using their extension number.
• If a PS in a PS ring group has set the DND feature for trunk calls, the PS will not ring when an intercom call or a trunk call arrives at the PS ring group. (
• For calls directed to PS ring groups, the PBX will handle at most two calls simultaneously.
The third call cannot arrive at a PS ring group until one of the first two calls is answered or a caller hangs up.
224 Feature Guide
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features
1.24.3 PS Directory
Description
A PS user can store numbers and/or names in the directory. A stored number is dialled by selecting a name or number in the directory.
Depending on the PS model, the PS user can use the following directories for easy operation:
Type
PS Dialling Directory
Description
Makes a call by selecting from a private directory of names and telephone numbers.
System Speed Dialling
Directory
Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of names
(
System Speed Dialling Name [002]) and numbers (
System Speed Dialling Number [001]).
PBX Extension Dialling
Directory
Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of extension names (
Shortcut Directory
Accesses a feature by selecting from a private directory of feature names and numbers.
Quick Dialling
Makes a call or accesses a feature easily by selecting from a private directory of names and numbers.
Feature Guide 225
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features
1.24.4 PS Feature Buttons
Description
A PS user can use PBX feature using a combination of buttons (button + a specified number,
, or #) and/or display operation. The flexible buttons and the display are customised through
PS programming. The button assignment is the same for PT. (
Some special feature buttons (e.g., WAVESEARCH button) may be customised depending on the PS type.
226 Feature Guide
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features
1.24.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Description
A PS can be used in parallel with a wired telephone (PT/SLT). In this case, the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone. When Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is enabled, the two telephones share one extension number (main telephone’s extension number) like XDP Parallel mode for a DPT and an SLT.
PBX
Super
Hybrid
Port
Cell Station
XDP Parallel Mode
Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode
DPT
Wireless Phone
Extn. 102
PT/SLT
Extn. 103
PS
Conditions
• If one of the telephones goes off-hook while the other telephone is on a call, the call is switched to the telephone going off-hook. However, the call is not switched in one of the following conditions:
a)
During a Conference call (
b)
While Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (
c)
While receiving OHCA (
1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)).
d)
While being monitored by another extension (
e)
During Consultation Hold.
f)
During a broadcasting call (
1.15.1 Broadcasting (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-
(Consultation Hold: Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting.)
• Wireless XDP Parallel Mode can only be set from a PS. The wired telephone can accept or deny this feature through COS programming (
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired
Telephone [515]). Once this feature is set, the setting at the wired telephone cannot be
changed unless a PS changes the setting.
Feature Guide 227
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features
• The following features are not available for extensions in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode while the PS is on a call (however, they are available for the extensions in Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode while the wired telephone is on a call):
– Executive Busy Override
– Whisper OHCA (
– CCBS (
1.20.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS))
• Most of the extension data (e.g., extension number, extension name) of the wired telephone is used for its PS as well. However, the PS has its own extension data for the following:
– Ring Tone Pattern Table Selection (
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection)
– Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming (
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming)
– Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing (
1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing)
– Hot Line Setting (
– Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park
– Display Language (
– ISDN Bearer Mode (
1.20.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—
– Flexible Button Assignment (
Note
To change the setting of the extension data above, the setting for the wired telephone or the PS must be changed individually. When changing the PS setting, use the PS’s original extension number (not the main telephone’s extension number), if required.
• When the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode has been set, the following extension data for the wired telephone is copied to the PBX extension data for the PS and the extension data remains there even when the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is cancelled.
– Call Waiting Setting (
– FWD/DND Setting (
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND))
– Call Pickup Deny Setting (
– Executive Busy Override Deny Setting
– Itemised Billing Code for ARS (
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS))
– Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park
– CLIP/COLP Number (
– CLIP/COLP Number Selection
– CLIR Setting
– COLR Setting
– Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) (
Identification Number (PIN) [005]) (
1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification
– COS Programming (
– User Group (
• If the Extension Feature Clear is performed, the corresponding extension data for both the wired telephone and the PS will be cleared. (
1.26.2 Extension Feature Clear)
• When a call arrives, both the wired telephone and the PS ring. However, in the following cases only the person who made the setting will receive ringing:
– Automatic Callback Busy
228 Feature Guide
1.24 Portable Station (PS) Features
– Transfer Recall, Hold Recall (
1.12.1 Call Hold), and Call Park Recall
Feature Guide References
1.7.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
1.20.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
User Manual References
User Manual
1.7.12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone (Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
Feature Guide 229
1.25 Administrative Information Output Features
1.25 Administrative Information Output Features
1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Description
Automatically records detailed information for each extension.
1.
SMDR Output Port
The Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to output the SMDR data.
The following devices can be connected:
• Serial Interface (RS-232C) port: Personal computer (PC), printer, etc.
2.
SMDR Output Data
The following data will be recorded and sent to the SMDR output port:
a)
Trunk call information (incoming/outgoing)
b)
Intercom call information (outgoing)
c)
Log-in/Log-out information
d)
PBX error log (
2.4.3 Local Alarm Information)
Memory for SMDR: A specified number of call information can be memorised for each
PBX. If more calls are originated or received, the oldest data is overwritten by the newest one.
230 Feature Guide
1.25 Administrative Information Output Features
3.
SMDR Format Type and Contents
There are the following three types of output format which can be selected through system programming:
Pattern A: 80 digits without call charge information
Date
(8 digits)
Time
(7)
Ext
(4)
CO
(2)
Dial Number
(25)
01/02/02 10:03AM
01/02/02 10:07AM
01/02/02 10:15AM
01/02/02 10:30AM
1200
1200
1200
*123
01
01
01
01
<I>12345678901234567890
<I>
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
Ring
(4)
Duration
(8)
ACC Code
(10)
CD
(3)
5'15
0'05
00:00'00
00:01'05
00:01'05
00:01'05
NA
9876543210
9876543210
9876543210
TR
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 01:07PM
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
01
01
01
01
01
<I>ABC COMPANY12345678
<D>CDE9876<I>Q COMPANY
ABC COMPANY12345678
123..............
123456XX
0'05
0'05
00:01'05
00:01'05
00:01'05
00:01'05
00:12'05
9876543210
9876543210
98765
01/02/02 08:33AM
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 03:35PM
01/02/02 03:45PM
1234
1234
1234
1234
In the office
LOG IN
LOG OUT
EXT12355
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Pattern B: 80 digits with call charge information
(6) (7) (8) (9)
Date Time
(8 digits) (7)
Ext
(4)
CO
(2)
Dial Number
(20)
Duration
(8)
Cost
(8+2)
ACC Code
(10)
CD
(3)
01/02/02 10:03AM
01/02/02 10:07AM
1210
2005
01
01
<I>
12345678901234567890 00:00'05 00560.00EU
9876543210
NA
(1)
(2) (3) (4) (5)
(7) (10) (8) (9)
Pattern C: 120 digits
Date
(8 digits)
Time
(7)
Ext
(4)
CO
(4)
Dial Number
(50)
Ring
(4)
Duration
(8)
Cost
(8+3)
ACC Code
(10)
CD
(3)
01/02/02 10:03AM
01/02/02 10:07AM
1230
1230
0001
0001
123456789012345678901234567890
<I>ABC COMPANY123456789012345 0'05
00:00'05
00:00'05
00560.00EUR
9876543210
9876543210
TR
TR
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(6) (7) (10) (8) (9)
Feature Guide 231
1.25 Administrative Information Output Features
[Explanation]
The following table explains the SMDR contents which are based on the numbers in the previous pattern examples. For the programmable items, refer to the following
[Programmable Items].
Number in the
Pattern
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Date
Time
Item Description
Shows the date of the call.
Shows the end time of a call as Hour/Minute/AM or PM.
Ext
(Extension)
CO (Trunk)
Shows the extension number, floating extension number, etc., which was engaged in the call.
Also shows the following codes:
Dxxx: Outgoing trunk call from a doorphone
(xxx=doorphone number) (
Txxx: Outgoing trunk call by TIE line service (xxx=trunk group number)
*xxx: Verified call (xxx=verified code) (
Shows the trunk number used for the call.
For patterns A and B, "00" will be shown for trunk numbers over hundred.
Dial Number [Trunk Call]
Outgoing Trunk Call
Shows the dialled telephone number.
Valid digits are as follows:
0 through 9, , #
P: Pause
F: EFA signal
=: A Host PBX Access code (
Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a
. (dot): Secret dialling
X: Privacy dial
–: Transferred call
If the transfer destination extension enters some digits, the entered digits will be added after "–".
(6) Ring
Incoming Trunk Call
Shows <I> + the caller’s identification name/number.
It is also possible to show the DDI/DID/MSN call information. In this case, <D> + DDI/DID/MSN name/number is added before <I> .
[Outgoing Intercom Call]
Shows the dialled extension number followed by "EXT".
[Log-in/Log-out]
Shows the log-in or log-out status.
Shows the ring duration before answering a call in
Minutes/Seconds.
232 Feature Guide
1.25 Administrative Information Output Features
Number in the
Pattern
(7)
Item
Duration
(8)
(9)
(10)
Acc Code
(Account
Code)
CD
(Condition
Code)
Cost
Description
Shows the duration of the trunk call in Hours/Minutes/
Seconds.
Shows the account code appended to the call. (
Shows other call information with the following codes:
CL: Collect call
TR: Transfer
FW: FWD to trunk
D0: Call using DISA or TIE line service
RM: Remote maintenance (modem) (
NA: Not answered call
RC: Received call
AN: Answered call
Shows the call charge.
[Programmable Items]
Item Description
Outgoing trunk call
Controls whether the outgoing trunk calls are shown. This setting is common throughout the PBX (
Call Printing [804]). COS programming is also required.
Incoming trunk call
Controls whether the incoming trunk calls are shown (
SMDR Incoming Call Printing [805]).
Outgoing intercom call
Controls whether the outgoing intercom calls are recorded.
Log-in/Log-out status
ARS dial
Controls whether the log-in/log-out status is recorded.
Controls whether the user-dialled number or the modified number is shown.
The Host PBX Access code ("=" followed by the access code) can be shown (as supplementary information) only when the modified number is selected in this setting. (
Caller’s identification
DID/DDI number
Controls whether the caller’s identification number, name, number and name, or nothing is shown. If " none
" is selected,
<I> will not be shown.
Controls whether the DID/DDI number, name, number and name, or nothing is shown. If " none
" is selected, <D> will not be shown.
Feature Guide 233
1.25 Administrative Information Output Features
Item
Secret dialling
Privacy dial
Date order
Received call
Answered call
Description
Controls secret dialling. If enabled, the dialled number will be shown as dots.
This setting is effective only when the modified number is selected in ARS dial setting above. If the user-dialled number is selected in ARS dial setting, the dialled number will be shown as dots regardless of this setting.
Enables or disables privacy dial. If enabled, the last four digits of the dialled telephone number and any additional digits after connection will be shown as "X". (e.g., 123-456-XXXX)
The date order is changeable: month/day/year, day/month/ year, year/month/day, year/day/month.
Controls whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is shown.
Controls whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is shown.
Conditions
•
SMDR Format
The following SMDR format can be set through system programming in order to match the paper size being used in the printer:
a)
Page Length: determines the number of lines per page (
b)
Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page (
The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip perforation length.
Explanation:
Page
Length
Skip
Perforation
Machine
Perforation
• The SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is reset.
• If the PBX is reset during a conversation, the call will not be recorded on the SMDR.
• The following calls are regarded as two separated calls in the SMDR:
– Calls before and after the flash/recall/EFA signal is manually sent during a conversation
– Trunk-to-trunk calls by Call Transfer, FWD or DISA (recording each as "incoming call" and "outgoing call")
234 Feature Guide
1.25 Administrative Information Output Features
• The PBX waits for a preprogrammed time period (
Call Duration Count Starting Time for
LCOT [208]) between the end of dialling and start of the SMDR timer for outgoing trunk
calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires, the PBX starts counting the call. A display PT shows the elapsed time of the call.
The starting time and the total duration of the call are recorded on SMDR.
If the reverse signal detection has been set (
1.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit), the PBX will start
counting the call after detecting the reverse signal from the telephone company regardless of the above timer.
•
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters
The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS-
232C) port (
RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code [800], RS-232C Parameter—Baud
Rate [800], RS-232C Parameter—Word Length [800], RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit
[800], RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length [800]).
a)
New Line Code: Select the code for the PC or printer. If the PC or printer automatically feeds lines with carriage return, select "
CR.
" If not, select "
CR+LF.
"
b)
Baud Rate: A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the PBX to the PC or printer.
c)
Word Length: A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character.
d)
Parity Bit: A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.
e)
Stop Bit Length: A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Feature Guide 235
1.25 Administrative Information Output Features
1.25.2 Charge Meter
Description
The PBX receives a call charge signal during or after a conversation with an outside party. The call charge information is shown on the telephone display and the SMDR.
1.
Call Charge Signal Service
Call charge signal service from the telephone company depends on the trunk being used.
Trunk
Analogue trunk
ISDN line
E1 line
Service
Pay Tone (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)*
Advice of Charge (AOC) (
Meter Pulse (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
*: When the pay tone service is used, pay tone type (12 kHz/16 kHz) should be selected (
Pay Tone Signal Type [491] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)).
2.
Call Charge Display
– Up to 7 digits (e.g., 88888.75)
– The decimal point position (the number of significant decimal digits) for currency is programmable. (
Decimal Point Position for Currency [130])
– Up to 3 currency characters are programmable. (e.g., EUR or for Euro) (
– The currency position either front or back of the call charge is programmable. (e.g.,
45.12 or 45.12 )
3.
Margin/Tax Rate Assignment
It is possible to add a margin (
Charge Margin [010]) and the tax ( Charge Tax [011])
to the call charges. The call charge rate per meter indication is programmable on a trunk group basis (
[Calculation Method]
The margin or tax rate must be xx.xx % (whole number part: two digits, decimal fraction: two digits). A calculation method depends on the information which is sent from the telephone company: meter indication or charge.
a)
Call charge with tax and margin in meter indication:
[Meter indication received from the telephone company] [Call Charge Rate]
[1 – Tax Rate] [1 – Margin Rate]
b)
Call charge with tax and margin in charge:
[Charge received from the telephone company] [Call Charge Rate]
[1 – Tax Rate] [1 – Margin Rate]
The calculation result is rounded up to the least significant decimal digit.
236 Feature Guide
1.25 Administrative Information Output Features
4.
Total Call Charge
– A PT user can show the total call charges on the display.
– The call charge is totalled on an extension, trunk, or verified code basis.
– The call charge on a verified code is not totalled for each extension.
5.
Budget Management
It is possible to limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension or verified code. For example, an extension in a rented office has a prepaid limit for the telephone usage. If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit, the extension user cannot make further trunk calls. An extension assigned as the manager may increase the limit or clear the previous call charge (
6.
Call Charge Management
A manager can use the following call charge management features in manager programming mode:
a)
Call Charge Fee Reference and Clear, for Each Extension/Verified Code
b)
Call Charge Fee Reference for Each Trunk
c)
Call Charge Rate Set for Each Trunk Group
d)
All Clear
e)
Call Charge Fee Print Out
f)
Budget Management for Each Extension/Verified Code.
[Examples of Call Charge Fee Reference]
******************************************************
* Charge Meter Print Out - Total & All CO *
******************************************************
Total Charge: 00175.95
CO Line
001: 00194.00
002: 00073.00
003: 00161.00
004: 00033.00
*******************************************************
* Charge Meter Print Out - All Extensions *
*******************************************************
Extension & Verified Code
*775: 00194.00
*102: 00073.00
*776: 00161.00
104: 00194.00
105: 00073.00
106: 00161.00
(Verified Code)
107: 00033.00
Note: *XXX: Call Charge Fee Reference for a verified code (XXX = verified code)
Feature Guide 237
1.25 Administrative Information Output Features
Conditions
[General]
•
Call Charge Fee Reference by Charge Reference Button
A display telephone user can check the total call charge for his own extension using the
Charge Reference button. A flexible button can be customised as the Charge Reference button.
[Pay Tone Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)]
• It is possible to select whether the PBX starts counting the call charge from when the PBX detects the answer signal from the telephone company.
• It is possible to enable the PBX to send the flash/recall signal to the telephone company after a conversation (in on-hook status) to receive the call charge information.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
3.2.2 Manager Programming
238 Feature Guide
1.26 Extension Controlling Features
1.26 Extension Controlling Features
1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Description
Each extension user can have his own PIN through system programming (
Personal Identification Number (PIN) [005]) or personal programming (Extension PIN
[Personal Identification Number]) to set features or access his own telephone remotely.
The following features cannot be used without the PIN:
a)
Live Call Screening (LCS)* (
1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
b)
Incoming and Outgoing Call Log Display Lock (
Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock (
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System)
c)
Walking Extension (
d)
Extension Lock (
e)
Remote Extension Control (
1.26.5 Remote Extension Control by User) and
Walking COS (
f)
Remote Extension Control and Walking COS using DISA (
*: If an extension user has assigned an extension PIN, this feature cannot be used without the PIN.
Conditions
WARNING
When a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/ extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)
Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.
b)
Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.
c)
Change the PIN frequently.
•
Extension PIN Lock
If the wrong PIN is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If the incorrect PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, the PIN against the extension will be locked. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.
This feature is also known as Station Password Lock.
•
Remote Extension PIN Clear
If an extension user forgets his PIN, a manager can clear the PIN. Then the extension user can assign a new PIN.
•
Extension PIN Display
It is possible to select whether to show the extension PIN on the display through system programming. By default, it is shown as dots.
Feature Guide 239
1.26 Extension Controlling Features
User Manual References
User Manual
3.1.2 Settings on the Programming Mode
3.2.2 Manager Programming
240 Feature Guide
1.26 Extension Controlling Features
1.26.2 Extension Feature Clear
Description
Extension users can clear all the following features set on their own telephone at once:
Absent Message
BGM
FWD*/DND*
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting*
Features
Data Line Security
Executive Busy Override Deny
Log-in/Log-out
Message Waiting
Paging Deny
Parallelled Telephone
Hot Line*
Timed Reminder
After Setting
Off
Off
Off
Allow
Disable (In Canada, the default setting is
"Enable" [Call Waiting tone].)
Off
Allow
Log-in
All messages left by other extensions will be cleared.
Allow
Paired SLT will ring.
Off
Cleared
Note: The features with "*" can be programmed not to be cancelled by this feature.
This feature is also known as Station Programme Clear.
Conditions
• Extension Lock (
1.8.3 Extension Lock) and the extension personal identification
number (PIN) (
1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)) will not be
cleared by this feature.
•
For Users in Canada only
If dial tone 2 is heard after Extension Feature Clear:
After performing Extension Feature Clear, Call Waiting will be enabled if "
Extension
Clear: Call Waiting
" is set to "
Clear
" through system programming. In this case, dial tone 2 will be heard when going off-hook. (
User Manual References
User Manual
1.7.13 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
Feature Guide 241
1.26 Extension Controlling Features
1.26.3 Walking Extension
Description
It is possible to use any extension and have your extension settings available to you. Settings such as extension number, one-touch dialling memory, and COS are all available to you at the new location.
[Example] This feature is useful when;
• Moving location
• There is no specific desk for your use.
This feature is also known as Walking Station.
Conditions
• This feature is available by switching the telephone between PT and PT, SLT and SLT, PT and SLT. Moving across the tenants is also possible.
• The incoming calls to your extension will also reach you at your new location.
• An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (
1.26.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN))
• If a DSS Console is connected to a PT and the DSS Console is continuously used with the
PT after the Walking Extension has been done, the new extension number of the PT must be assigned as the paired extension through system programming (
User Manual References
User Manual
1.10.1 Using the Same Settings as Your Previous Extension (Walking Extension)
242 Feature Guide
1.26 Extension Controlling Features
1.26.4 Timed Reminder
Description
Each extension user can set an alarm for any time as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can be programmed to activate only once or daily. If the user goes off-hook during the alarm, he hears special dial tone. If a voice message is used, he hears a prerecorded voice message.
Conditions
• Be sure that the PBX clock works.
• Setting a new time clears the previous time.
•
Programmable Time
The Alarm Ringing Duration time, the number of alarm repeat times, and intervals are programmable through system programming.
•
To use the voice message feature:
The MSG card is required and the message must be recorded. An extension assigned as the manager can record messages. (
1.16.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)) The different
message can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.6.5 MSG4 Card
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.5.4 MSG2 Card
User Manual References
User Manual
1.7.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
Feature Guide 243
1.26 Extension Controlling Features
1.26.5 Remote Extension Control by User
Description
A user can remotely change the feature settings (e.g., FWD) and time service mode for his own extension from inside or outside the PBX using DISA (
1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)). This feature can be used only on the extensions which are allowed to be controlled
remotely on a COS basis.
The following features are available:
a)
FWD/DND (
1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND))
b)
Log-in/Log-out (
c)
Absent Message (
d)
Extension Lock (
e)
Time Service—Changing the Time Mode (day/lunch/break/night) (
This feature is also known as Remote Station Control by User.
Conditions
•
Extension PIN
An extension personal identification number (PIN) (
Extension Personal Identification
Number (PIN) [005]) is required to use this feature. (
Identification Number (PIN)) If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be
disconnected.
• Remote operation is not available for the extensions in the Internal Call Block mode. (
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA (Remote Setting)
244 Feature Guide
1.27 Audible Tone Features
1.27 Audible Tone Features
1.27.1 Dial Tone
Description
The following dial tones inform extensions about features activated on the extensions:
Each dial tone type has two frequencies (e.g., dial tone 1A and dial tone 1B).
Type
Tone 1A/1B
Tone 2A/2B
Tone 3A/3B
Tone 4A/4B
Description
A normal dial tone is heard when:
a) No features listed for dial tones 2 through 4 has been set, or
b) ARS is used.
Any one of the features below is set.
• Absent Message
• BGM
• FWD
• Call Pickup Deny
• Call Waiting
• DND
• Extension Lock
• Executive Busy Override Deny
• Hot Line
• Timed Reminder
While a called PS is being searched, or any one of the features below is performed.
• Account Code Entry
• Consultation Hold
• Answering a Timed Reminder call with no message
Messages are waiting for the extension.
Conditions
•
Dial Tone Type A/B
It is possible to select dial tone type A or B for dial tones 1 through 4. If "
Type A
" is selected, all dial tones 1 through 4 will become dial tone type A.
The dial tone type for the ARS feature can be selected separately. If "
Type A
" is selected for the ARS, dial tone 1A will be heard. If "
Type B
" is selected, dial tone 1B will be heard.
•
Distinctive Dial tone
Distinctive dial tone mode can be disabled. In this case, dial tone 1 will be sent.
•
Dial Tone Patterns
All dial tone patterns have a default (
• Only dial tone 1 is sent to the extensions in the VM (DPT/DTMF) group. (
Feature Guide 245
1.27 Audible Tone Features
1.27.2 Confirmation Tone
Description
At the end of feature operations, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to extension users.
Type
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3-1
Tone 3-2
Tone 4-1
Tone 4-2
Tone 5
Description
a) Sent when the setting is accepted.
b) Sent when a call is received in voice-calling mode (Alternate
Receiving—Ring/Voice). The caller’s voice will be heard after the tone.
a) Sent from an external paging device or an extension before being paged.
b) Sent when a call is received in Hands-free Answerback mode.
a) Sent before a conversation is established when using the
Paging feature.
b) Sent when a conversation is established with the extension in the following modes after the call making operation:
• Hands-free Answerback mode
• Voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice)
Sent just before a conversation is established when accessing the following features by the feature numbers:
• Call Park Retrieve
• Call Pickup
• Hold Retrieve
• Paging Answer
• TAFAS
Sent when moving from a two-party call to a three-party call.
(e.g., Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release,
Two-way Record.)
Sent when moving from a three-party call to a two-party call.
(e.g., Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release,
Two-way Record.)
Sent when a call is placed on hold (including Consultation Hold).
Conditions
•
Confirmation Tone Patterns
All confirmation tone patterns have a default (
• It is possible to eliminate each tone.
246 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features
1.28 Networking Features
1.28.1 TIE Line Service
Description
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. The TIE lines can be used to call through the PBX to reach another switching system (PBX or telephone company). By using TIE lines, the PBX can support not only communications with the public network but with other company members in the private network where the PBX is included.
Interface
The following interfaces can be used to establish a private network:
Interface Network Type
E & M
Analogue
T1 (TIE [E & M])
Digital (64 kbps
×
24 channels)
E1 (E & M)
Digital (64 kbps
×
30 channels)
BRI/PRI (QSIG)
Digital (ISDN 2B+D/30B+D/23B+D)
VoIP
Internet Protocol (IP)
A trunk which is used for a private network should be assigned "
Private
" as the networking type. (
1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY)
Explanation
1.
Making a TIE Line Call
One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE line call.
a)
Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)
Dial the [Extension Number] only.
Feature Guide 247
1.28 Networking Features
[Example]
PBX-1
Interface
PBX-2
TIE Line
Interface Interface
TIE Line
PBX-3
Interface
Extn.1011
Extn.1012
Extn. 2011 Extn. 3011
Dials "3011".
Dials "2011".
Explanation:
To use this method, it is necessary to change the first one or two digits of extension numbers of either PBX (e.g., 10XX for PBX-1, 20XX for PBX-2) to avoid having the same extension number.
Case 1:
Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials extension number "2011".
Extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "2011" of PBX-2.
Case 2:
Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials extension number "3011".
Extension 1011 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "3011" of PBX-3.
b)
PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)
Dial the [TIE Line Access Number] + [PBX Code] + [Extension Number].
[Example]
PBX-1
PBX Code 951
PBX-2
PBX Code 952
PBX-3
PBX Code 953
Interface
TIE Line
Interface Interface
TIE Line
Interface
Extn.1011
Extn.1012
Dials "7-953-1011".
Dials "7-952-1011".
[PBX code]
[TIE line
access no.]
[Extn. no.]
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011
248 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features
Explanation:
To use this method, it is necessary to know each PBX code in order to identify the location of an extension.
Case 1:
Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", and extension number "1011".
Extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "1011" of PBX-2.
Case 2:
Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "953", and extension number "1011".
Extension 1011 of PBX-1 is connected to extension "1011" of PBX-3.
2.
TIE Line Routing and Modification Table
2.1 To Make a TIE Line Call
The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table is referenced by the PBX to identify the trunk route when an extension user makes a TIE line call.
It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs in the TIE line network.
The routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the dialled number.
There are two system programmes for the tables:
TIE Line Routing Table: used to assign the leading numbers (PBX code or extension number) and trunk group hunt sequence.
TIE Modify Removed Number of Digits/Added Number: used to remove digits from and add a number to the dialled number of the TIE line call. This modification may be needed depending on the TIE line network configuration.
[Programming Examples]
Your PBX is PBX-1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line network. To identify the trunk route as illustrated, you should make the following tables.
a) Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)
TIE Line Network
PBX-4
PBX-3
Extn. 4xxx
TRG 2 b-2nd) 3xxx c) 4xxx
If you dial: a) 2xxx b) 3xxx c) 4xxx
(2, 3, 4: Other PBX
Extension Number
[TIE] in the Flexible
Numbering Plan)
Extn. 1xxx
PBX-1
TRG 1 a) 2xxx b-1st) 3xxx
Extn. 3xxx
PBX-2
Extn. 2xxx
Feature Guide 249
1.28 Networking Features
[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1]
Priority 1 Priority 2 . .
Location
No.
Leading
No.
Trunk
Group
Dial Modification
Removed
No. of
Digits
Added
No.
Trunk
Group
Dial Modification . .
Removed
No. of
Digits
Added
No.
. .
01
02
03
:
2
3
4
:
1
1
2
:
0
0
0
: :
2
:
0
: :
. .
:
. .
. .
Explanation:
Location 01: The hunt sequence by dialling [2XXX]:
The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 1 Sending no. to PBX-2: 2XXX
Location 02: The hunt sequence by dialling [3XXX]:
The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 1 Sending no. to PBX-2: 3XXX
The 2nd route—trunk group (TRG) 2 Sending no. to PBX-4: 3XXX
Location 03: The hunt sequence by dialling [4XXX]:
The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 2 Sending no. to PBX-4: 4XXX
b) PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)
TIE Line Network
PBX-4
PBX Code 954
PBX-3
PBX Code 953
Extn. xxxx
Extn. xxxx
If you dial: a) 7-952-xxxx b) 7-953-xxxx c) 7-954-xxxx
(7: TIE Line Access
Number in the
Flexible
Numbering Plan)
TRG 2 b-2nd) 953#-xxxx c) 954#-xxxx
Extn. 1xxx
PBX-1
PBX Code 951
TRG 1 a) 952-xxxx b-1st) 953-xxxx
PBX-2
PBX Code 952
Extn. xxxx
250 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features
[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1]
Priority 1 Priority 2 . .
Location
No.
Leading
No.
Trunk
Group
Dial Modification
Removed
No. of
Digits
Added
No.
Dial Modification . .
Trunk
Group
Removed
No. of
Digits
Added
No.
. .
01 952 1 0 . .
02
03
953
954
1
2
0
3
2 3
953# . .
. .
: : : :
954#
: : : : :
Explanation:
Location 01: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 952+XXXX]:
The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 1
Sending no. to PBX-2: 952–XXXX
Location 02: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 953+XXXX]:
The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 1
Sending no. to PBX-2: 953–XXXX
The 2nd route — trunk group (TRG) 2
Sending no. to PBX-4: 953#–XXXX
Location 03: The hunt sequence by dialling [7+PBX Code 954+XXXX]:
The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 2
Sending no. to PBX-4: 954#–XXXX
Feature Guide 251
1.28 Networking Features
2.2 To Receive a TIE Line Call a) Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)
[Example]
PBX-4
Extn. 1011
Dials "3011".
PBX-1
TIE Line Network
1 3011
PBX-3
PBX-2
3
Extn. 3011
2 3011
Extn. 2011
1
A TIE line call is sent to PBX-2 from PBX-1. If the number sent from PBX-1 is an extension number of PBX-2 (e.g., 2011), the call will be received at extension "2011". If not, PBX-2 checks the number in the TIE
Line Routing and Modified
Table of PBX-2.
2
If the match is found in the table, the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX
(PBX-3).
3
The number sent from PBX-2
"3011" is an extension number of PBX-3. The call is received at extension "3011".
Note
When a TIE line call is sent to a PBX from another PBX, first the PBX modifies the number sent to the PBX according to the assignment for each trunk port of the PBX: the removed number of digits from and/or added number to the number sent to the PBX is determined by the assignment. Then the PBX starts to check the number whether the number is an extension number of the PBX.
252 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features b) PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)
[Example]
PBX-4
PBX Code 954
TIE Line Network
Extn. 1011
Dials "7-953-1011".
PBX-1
PBX Code 951
1
953-1011
PBX-3
PBX Code 953
3
Extn. 1011
2
953-1011
PBX-2
PBX Code 952
Extn. 1011
1
A TIE line call is sent to PBX-2 from PBX-1. If the number sent from PBX-1 has the PBX code of PBX-2 "952", the call will be received at the corresponding extension of PBX-2 (e.g.,
1011of PBX-2). If not, PBX-2 checks the number in the TIE
Line Routing and Modified
Table of PBX-2.
2
If the match is found in the table, the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX
(PBX-3).
3
The number sent from PBX-2
"953-1011" has the PBX code of PBX-3 "953". The call is received at extension "1011" of
PBX-3.
Note
When a TIE line call is sent to a PBX from another PBX, first the PBX modifies the number sent to the PBX according to the assignment for each trunk port of the PBX: the removed number of digits from and/or added number to the number sent to the PBX is determined by the assignment. Then the PBX starts to check the number whether the number has the PBX code of the PBX.
3.
TIE Line and Trunk Connection
To connect the TIE line with the trunk, the following patterns are available:
1) Trunk-to-TIE Access
2) TIE-to-Trunk Access
3) Trunk-to-TIE-to-Trunk Access
3.1 Trunk-to-TIE Access
It is possible to assign an extension of another PBX as the destination of incoming trunk calls to the own PBX.
Feature Guide 253
1.28 Networking Features a) Incoming Trunk Call Destination Assignment
[Example]
Trunk
Telephone Company
Trunk
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
DID No: 123-4567
Destination: 2011
Interface
TIE Line
PBX-2
Interface
Outside Caller
Dials "123-4567".
Extn. 1011
Extn. 2011
(DID No.:123-4567)
Explanation:
An outside caller dials the DID number "123-4567". The call is sent to extension
"2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line according to the assignment of the DID call destination (
DID Destination [453]) of PBX-1. (
Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI))
b) FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the TIE Line
[Example]
Telephone Company
Trunk
PBX-1
Trunk
TIE Line Network
TIE Line
Interface
PBX-2
Interface
Forwarded/Transferred
/Intercepted to 2011
Outside Caller
Dials "123-4567".
Extn. 1011
(DID No.: 123-4567)
Extn. 2011
254 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features
Explanation:
An outside caller dials the DID number "123-4567". The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-1), and the call is forwarded, transferred, or intercepted to extension "2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line.
3.2 TIE-to-Trunk Access
The PBX sends TIE line calls to the trunks of another PBX through the TIE lines.
a) Trunk Call through Other PBXs—by Making a TIE Line Call Method
[Example]
<Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)>
Telephone Company
Trunk
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
9-01-23-4567
Interface
TIE Line
TRG 2
PBX-2
Interface
01-23-4567
Trunk
Extn. 1011
Dials "802-9-01-23-4567".
Extn. 2011
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", trunk group number "02" (TRG2), Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "01-23-4567".
2. PBX-1 sends the call to PBX-2 through the trunk group (TRG) 2 (TIE line).
3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567".
Feature Guide 255
1.28 Networking Features
<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)>
Telephone Company
Trunk
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
PBX Code 951
952-9-01-23-4567
PBX-2
PBX Code 952
Interface
TIE Line
TRG 2
Interface
01-23-4567
Trunk
Extn. 1011
Dials "7-952-9-01-23-4567" or
"802-952-9-01-23-4567".
Extn. 1011
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code
"952", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "01-23-
4567"; or dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", trunk group number "02" (TRG2), PBX code "952", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2
"9", and telephone number "01-23-4567".
2. The call is connected to the outside party "01-23-4567" through PBX-2 which has PBX code "952".
256 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features b) Trunk Call through Other PBXs—by the ARS feature
[Example]
<Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)>
Telephone Company
Trunk
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
9-01-23-4567
Interface
TIE Line
TRG 2
PBX-2
Interface
01-23-4567
Trunk
Extn. 1011
Dials "9-01-23-4567".
Extn. 2011
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone number "01-23-4567".
2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.
3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567".
Feature Guide 257
1.28 Networking Features
<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)>
Telephone Company
Trunk
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
PBX Code 951
952-9-01-23-4567
PBX-2
PBX Code 952
Interface
TIE Line
TRG 2
Interface
01-23-4567
Trunk
Extn. 1011
Dials "9-01-23-4567".
Extn. 1011
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone number "01-23-4567".
2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-
2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.
3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567".
258 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features c) Blocking of Trunk Call through Other PBXs and How to Override It
To prohibit a TIE line call to go through PBX-2 for making a trunk call, if PBX-2 is Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX (e.g., KX-TDA100 or KX-TDA200), PBX-2 should disable the trunk group of the outgoing call from PBX-2 against the COS of the trunk group of the incoming call to PBX-2 (
Trunk Group Number [500]) like
the programming example shown below. TRS/Barring applies to a TIE line call on a COS of the trunk group of the incoming call basis. To override this prohibition, access the DISA floating extension number of PBX-2 and enter a verified code to change the COS temporarily.
[Programming Example of PBX-2]
Trunk Group No.
1
2
3
:
COS No.
3
2
2
:
TRG of Incoming
Call
TRG 1
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
: :
Outgoing Call
TRG 2 TRG 3
: :
: Block
…
:
Feature Guide 259
1.28 Networking Features
[Example]
Telephone Company
Trunk
Trunk
TIE Line Network
01-23-4567
TRG 3
of PBX-2
PBX-1
PBX-Code 951
Interface
TIE Line
TRG 2 of PBX-1
PBX-2
PBX-Code 952
952-9-01-23-4567
TRG 1 (COS 3)
of PBX-2
Interface DISA
952-(DISA Floating extn. no. + verified code entry feature no. + + verified code + verified code
PIN)-9-01-23-4567
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1012
Dials "7-952-9-01-
23-4567".
Dials "7-952-(DISA Floating extn. no. + verified code entry feature no. + + verified code + verified code PIN)
-9-01-23-4567".
Explanation:
Case 1:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code
"952", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "01-23-
4567".
2. The call is not connected to the outside party "01-23-4567" through PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" due to the COS assignment of the trunk groups of PBX-2.
Case 2:
1. Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code
"952", "DISA floating extension number of PBX-2 + verified code entry feature number + + verified code + verified code personal identification number (PIN)", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number
"01-23-4567".
2. The call overrides the COS assignment of the trunk groups of PBX-2, and the call is connected to the outside party "01-23-4567" through PBX-2 which has
PBX code "952".
260 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features d) FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the Trunk
[Example]
Telephone Company
Trunk
PBX-1
PBX-Code 951
TIE Line Network
952-1011
TIE Line
Interface
PBX-2
PBX-Code 952
Interface
Forwarded/Transferred/
Intercepted to 01-23-4567
Trunk
Extn. 1011
Dials "7-952-1011".
Extn. 1011
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code
"952", and extension number "1011".
2. The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-2) through the TIE line, and the call is forwarded, transferred or intercepted to the outside party
"01-23-4567" through the trunk.
Feature Guide 261
1.28 Networking Features
3.3 Trunk-to-TIE-to-Trunk Access
An outside caller can be connected to an outside party through the TIE line by using the DISA feature.
[Example]
Telephone Company
Trunk
Outside Caller
Dials "(DISA phone number)-9-01-23-
4567".
Trunk Trunk
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
PBX-Code 951
952-9-01-23-4567
DISA Interface
TIE Line
TRG 2
PBX-2
PBX-Code 952
Interface
01-23-
4567
Trunk
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011
Explanation:
1. The outside caller dials the "DISA phone number of PBX-1", Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9", and telephone number "01-23-4567".
2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-
2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.
3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "01-23-4567".
262 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features
4.
TIE Line Routing Flowchart
[Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension]
A TIE line call is made as follows:
PBX Code Method: 7-abc-xxxx
Extension No. Method: dexx
Is the dialled number identified as a TIE line access no. or an other PBX extension no. in the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX?
No
A
Yes:
TIE line access no.: 7
Other PBX extension no.: de
Is the leading number (abc or de) found in the TIE Line
Routing and Modification Table of the own PBX?
Yes
No
Selects the corresponding trunk group, and the dialled number is modified if a removed number of digits and/or added number is assigned.
Not treated as a TIE line call.
Reorder tone
Is the trunk group available?
Yes
Is there an idle trunk in the trunk group?
Yes
Routes to other PBX or trunk.
No
No
Reorder tone
Busy tone
Feature Guide 263
1.28 Networking Features
[Receiving a Call through a TIE Line]
<Extension Number Method
(Access without PBX Code)>
A call is received through a
TIE line as follows:
# 1021
The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port.
Removed number of digits: 1
Added number: None
Received number: # 1021
Modified number: # 1021=1021
Remove the first 1 digit.
<PBX Code Method
(Access with PBX Code)>
A call is received through a
TIE line as follows:
## 0511033
The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port.
Removed number of digits: 3
Added number: 9
Received number: ## 0511033
Modified number: ##0511033= 9511033
1) Remove the first 3 digits.
2) Add "9".
Does the modified number have the own PBX code "951"?
No
1021
Yes: 9511033
Goes to
A
Removes the own PBX code "951".
1033 flowchart of [Making a TIE Line Call from an
Extension].)
Checks the modified number with the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX
.
Operator Call No.
Directs the call to the operator.
No
Extension No.
of the Own PBX
Does the corresponding extension exist?
Yes
Is the corresponding extension idle?
Yes
Calls the extension.
No
Extension No.
of Other PBX
Goes to
A
Idle Line
Access No.
or
Trunk Group
Access No.
[Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension].)
Is the trunk
group of the outgoing call from the own PBX enabled against the COS of the trunk group of the incoming call to the own PBX?
Others
Reorder tone.
No
Reorder tone
Sends reorder tone, or sends the call to the operator
(Intercept Routing
—No Destination).
Yes
TRS/Barring applies.
Call Waiting
Busy tone
Intercept Routing
—Busy/DND
Sends the call to the trunk.
264 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features
Conditions
• When a TIE line call arrives at a busy extension which has disabled Call Waiting, the caller will hear a busy tone. If required, Intercept Routing—Busy/DND can be activated.
• The Inter-digit time can be assigned for TIE line calls.
Feature Guide References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
2.3.5 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.1 Basic Calling
Feature Guide 265
1.28 Networking Features
1.28.2 Virtual Private Network (VPN)
Description
Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a service provided by the telephone company. It uses an existing line as if it were a private line. There is no need to set up a private line or to lease a line from the telephone company. Making and receiving both public and private calls is possible using the same line.
Public/Private Discrimination: a)
When making a call: The public/private discrimination number is required before sending the dialled number to the telephone company. The public/private discrimination number can be dialled manually, or automatically by ARS programming
(
1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)) and/or TIE line service programming.
b)
When receiving a call: The telephone company distinguishes the call type. If it is a private call, the call is received by the TIE line service method. If it is a public call, the call is received by the Incoming Trunk Call Distribution method (DIL/DDI/MSN) which is assigned on the trunk.
[Example]
Public ISDN
<Public
Discrimination>
9-0-01-23-4567
Public No.
VPN
PBX-1
PBX Code 111
Head
Office
<Private
Discrimination>
113-401
Private No.
PBX-2
PBX Code 112
Branch
Office
01-23-4567
PBX-3
PBX Code 113
Branch
Office
Dials
"01-45-6789".
Extn. 201 Extn. 202
Dials "9-01-23-4567".
(ARS)
Dials "401".
(TIE)
Extn. 301 Extn. 302
(DDI No.:
01-45-6789)
Extn. 401 Extn. 402
Note:
Public Call
Private Call
Conditions
• Each trunk has its service type: public, private, or VPN. Select VPN to use this service through system programming.
266 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features
• Even if the telephone company does not support the VPN service, it is possible to use the same kind of service when making a call by TIE line service programming, and/or Quick
Dialling programming (
[Quick Dialling Programming Example]
Location No.
Quick Dialling No.
Quick Dialling 01 2345 (extension no. of other PBX)
: :
Desired No.
9-123-4321 (Public no. of extension 2345)
:
Explanation:
When an extension user dials "2345", he is connected to extension "2345" of other PBX whose public number is "123-4321".
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 267
1.28 Networking Features
1.28.3 QSIG Network
1.28.3.1 QSIG Network—SUMMARY
Description
QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN (Q.931) and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network. The QSIG network supports private communications by the TIE line service method.
Each ISDN (QSIG) connection must have a master port on one Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX and a slave port on the other Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX to establish a QSIG network.
[Connection Example]
Extn.1000
:
Extn.1999
PBX-1
(A) Master (A) Slave
PBX-2
Extn. 2000
:
Extn. 2999
QSIG Network
(B) Master (C) Slave
(B) Slave
(C) Master
PBX-3
Extn. 3000
:
Extn. 3999
System programming controls the following services individually for each ISDN (QSIG) port.
[Service Table]
Service
Calling Line
Identification
Presentation (CLIP)
Connected Line
Identification
Presentation (COLP)
Calling Line
Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Connected Line
Identification
Restriction (COLR)
Description Details in
Sends the caller’s number to the QSIG network when making a call.
Sends the number of the answered party to the
QSIG network when answering a call.
Prevents the caller’s CLI being presented to the called party by the caller.
Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party.
268 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features
Service
Calling Name
Identification
Presentation (CNIP)
Connected Name
Identification
Presentation (CONP)
Calling Name
Identification
Restriction (CNIR)
Connected Name
Identification
Restriction (CONR)
Call Forwarding (CF)— by QSIG
*
Forwards a call to the QSIG network.
Call Transfer (CT)—by
QSIG
*
Description
Sends the caller’s name to the QSIG network when making a call.
Sends the name of the answered party to the
QSIG network when answering a call.
Prevents the caller’s name being presented to the called party by the caller.
Prevents CONP being sent by the answered party.
Transfers a call to the QSIG network.
Details in
Completion of Calls to
Busy Subscriber
(CCBS)—by QSIG
*
Receives callback ringing when a busy called party on the QSIG network becomes free.
*: This feature is not available for the PRI23 card.
Feature Guide References
1.20.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Feature Guide 269
1.28 Networking Features
1.28.3.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification
Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
Description
Calling Line/Name Identification Presentation (CLIP/CNIP):
The PBX can send a preprogrammed extension number and/or name to the QSIG network when an extension user makes a call. The called party can see the number and/or name on his telephone display before answering the call.
Connected Line/Name Identification Presentation (COLP/CONP):
The PBX sends a preprogrammed extension number and/or name to the QSIG network when the extension user answers an incoming call. The caller can see the number and/or name of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered.
These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications:
CLIP/COLP: ETS 300 172 Circuit mode basis services.
CNIP/CONP: ETS 300 238 Name identification supplementary services.
[CLIP/CNIP Example]
1) Dials "202".
2) "John
101"
is displayed.
PBX-1
CLIP: 101
CNIP: John
PBX-2
Caller
(Extn. No.: 101
Extn. Name: John)
Called party
(Extn. No.: 202)
[COLP/CONP Example]
1) Dials "203".
Caller
3) "Paul
204"
is displayed.
PBX-1
COLP: 204
CONP: Paul
PBX-2
Called party
(Extn. No.: 203
Extn. Name: Tom)
FWD, IRNA, etc.
Answering party
(Extn. No.: 204
Extn. Name: Paul)
2) Answers the call.
270 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features
CLIP/COLP Number:
The extension number sent to the QSIG network for CLIP/COLP can be assigned for each extension through system programming (
CNIP/CONP Name:
The extension name sent to the QSIG network for CNIP/CONP can be assigned for each extension through system programming (
Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR):
It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension number to the QSIG network by pressing the CLIR button, COLR button, or entering the feature number.
Calling/Connected Name Identification Restriction (CNIR/CONR):
It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension name to the QSIG network. When CLIR is activated, CNIR becomes active automatically. When COLR is activated, CONR becomes active automatically.
These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications:
CLIR/COLR: ETS 300 172 Circuit mode basis services.
CNIR/CONR: ETS 300 238 Name identification supplementary services.
Conditions
•
COLP/CLIR/COLR/CNIP/CONP/CNIR/CONR Assignment for Each Port
Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN (QSIG) port of the PBX.
•
CLIR Button and COLR Button
It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button, and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button. A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.7.4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller’s Telephone
(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation [CLIP/COLP])
1.7.5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller’s Telephone
(Connected Line Identification Restriction [COLR])
1.7.6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party’s Telephone (Calling
Line Identification Restriction [CLIR])
Feature Guide 271
1.28 Networking Features
1.28.3.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
Description
The PBX forwards the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network. The destination can be set on your own PBX on an extension basis as the forward destination of trunk calls (
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)).
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 257 Diversion supplementary services.
If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call, the following situation will be possible.
[Example]
QSIG
PBX-1
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001
Dials "2000".
1
Call to 2000
2
Forwarded to 1001
PBX-2
Extn. 2000
(Forward Destination
of Trunk Calls: 1001)
1
Extension 1000 of PBX-1 dials extension number
"2000", and the call is sent to extension "2000" of PBX-2 through QSIG network.
2
The call is forwarded to the forward destination of trunk calls of extension 2000, which is extension "1001" of
PBX-1.
3
The call between PBX-1 and
PBX-2 is released, and the call is connected directly to the forward destination of extension 2000.
QSIG
PBX-1 PBX-2
3
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001 Extn. 2000
Conditions
• This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN (QSIG) port of the PBX.
272 Feature Guide
User Manual References
User Manual
1.5.1 Forwarding Calls
1.28 Networking Features
Feature Guide 273
1.28 Networking Features
1.28.3.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
Description
The PBX transfers the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network.
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 261 Call transfer supplementary service.
If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the transferred call, the following situation will be possible.
[Example]
QSIG
PBX-1
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001
Dials "2000".
1
Call to 2000
2
Transferred to 1001
PBX-2
Extn. 2000
1
Extension 1000 of PBX-1 dials extension number
"2000", and the call is sent to extension "2000" of PBX-2 through QSIG network.
2
The call is transferred from extension 2000 to extension
"1001" of PBX-1.
3
The call between PBX-1 and
PBX-2 is released, and the call is connected directly to the transfer destination of extension 2000.
QSIG
PBX-1
3
PBX-2
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001 Extn. 2000
Conditions
• This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN (QSIG) port basis.
• Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible.
(
274 Feature Guide
User Manual References
User Manual
1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
1.28 Networking Features
Feature Guide 275
1.28 Networking Features
1.28.3.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by
QSIG
Description
If the call has been made to an extension in another PBX in QSIG network and the called party is busy, an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free. When the user answers the callback ringing, that party's number is automatically dialled.
This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard (ETS) specifications: ETS 300 366 Call completion supplementary services.
Conditions
• This feature is available under the following conditions:
a)
The caller’s PBX is capable of using CCBS.
b)
The called party's PBX is capable of accepting CCBS.
• To receive and send CCBS, receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN (QSIG) port basis through system programming.
• An extension user can set only one CCBS. The last setting is effective.
• The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer
276 Feature Guide
1.28 Networking Features
1.28.4 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
Description
The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals are converted into IP packets and sent through this network.
VoIP network supports the private network communications by the TIE line service method.
[Example]
PBX-1 PBX-2
Extn.1000
:
Extn.1999
IP-GW
Router
Private IP
Network
Router
IP-GW
Extn.2000
:
Extn.2999
Dials "2999".
PBX-3
Router
IP-GW
Extn.3000
:
Extn.3999
[Required Programming]
PBX
Device
IP-GW
(IP Gateway Circuit)
Programming
For making a call:
• ARS programming (
Selection (ARS)) or TIE line service
programming
For receiving a call:
• TIE line service programming
• IP address assignment for the own PBX and other PBXs.
Conditions
• QSIG service is available. (
Feature Guide References
Feature Guide 277
1.29 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features
1.29 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Features
1.29.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Description
Connecting a personal computer (PC) to this PBX (via a DPT with the USB Module, or via a
Server PC on a LAN) enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in the PC or in the Server PC.
There are two types of CTI as follows:
1)
First Party Call Control
2)
Third Party Call Control
1.
First Party Call Control
A PC is connected to a DPT using a USB port (USB Module) attached to the DPT. The PC monitors the status of the DPT and controls the DPT.
PBX
USB
DPT
PC
2.
Third Party Call Control
A Server PC is connected to the PBX using the USB port on the PBX or using the CTI-
LINK card as a CTI interface. PCs monitor the status of the PBX and control the PBX via the Server PC.
PBX
Server PC
LAN or USB
CTI
Interface
PC PC
LAN
278 Feature Guide
1.29 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features
Conditions
•
Application Programming Interface (API)/Protocol
The following interface is required for First Party Call Control and Third Party Call Control:
Type
First Party Call
Control
•
API/Protocol
ECMA CSTA Phase 3
Third Party Call
Control
• ECMA CSTA Phase 3
• TAPI 2.1
• The operating system of PC or Server PC required for First Party Call Control or Third
Party Call Control depends on your CTI application software. For details, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.
• One Server PC can be connected per PBX.
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.3.1 MPR Card
2.6.6 CTI-LINK Card
2.7.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection
2.11.1 Connection of Peripherals
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.6.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection
6.10.1 Connection of Peripherals
Feature Guide 279
1.29 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features
280 Feature Guide
Section 2
System Configuration and Administration
Features
Feature Guide 281
2.1 System Configuration—Hardware
2.1
System Configuration—Hardware
2.1.1
Extension Port Configuration
Description
There are three types of extension ports as follows:
a)
DPT Port: DPT, DSS Console, Panasonic VPS (KX-TVS/TVP series [DPT (Digital)
Integration]), or PT-interface CS (e.g., KX-TDA0141) can be connected.
b)
SLT Port: SLT or KX-TVS/TVP series (DTMF Integration) can be connected.
c)
Super Hybrid Port: DPT, APT, SLT, DSS Console, KX-TVS/TVP series, or PTinterface CS can be connected.
EXtra Device Port (XDP) of Super Hybrid Ports:
A DPT and SLT can be connected to one Super Hybrid port (TR: SLT, HL: DPT). In this case, the SLT port (TR) of the Super Hybrid port can be used as an XDP port to connect an SLT as a sub telephone. There are two modes for the XDP port as follows:
Mode
Parallel Mode
XDP Mode
Description
The DPT and SLT have the same extension number so that they can act as one extension. They use the main telephone’s (DPT’s) extension data (e.g., extension number, COS).
(
The DPT and SLT have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions. To use XDP mode,
XDP mode must be enabled (on) the port through system programming (
EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode [600]).
Conditions
•
Automatic Detection on Super Hybrid Port
A DPT, APT, SLT, or PT-interface CS can be connected to a Super Hybrid port without programming.
• A DSS Console or a VPS (Panasonic KX-TVS/TVP series [DPT (Digital) Integration]) can also be connected with an SLT in XDP mode.
•
APT and SLT in Parallel Mode
An APT and an SLT can also be connected to a Super Hybrid port and used in parallel mode.
•
Digital XDP
A DPT can be connected to another DPT and act as a completely different extension. (
•
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
A PS can be used in parallel mode with a wired telephone.
(
1.24.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
•
DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment
When a DSS Console is connected, a paired extension must be assigned through system programming (
Console Paired Telephone [007]). Only a PT can be a paired extension.
282 Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2
System Configuration—Software
2.2.1
Class of Service (COS)
Description
Each extension is assigned a COS number (
Class of Service [602]). The following features
are controlled on a COS basis:
a)
Internal Call Block (
b)
FWD (
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD))
c)
DND Override (
d)
Call Pickup (
e)
Account Code Entry (
f)
External Call Block (
g)
Executive Busy Override (
1.7.2 Executive Busy Override)
h)
Call Monitor (
i)
OHCA (
1.7.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA))
j)
Whisper OHCA (
k)
TRS/Call Barring (
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring))
l)
Extension Lock (
m)
Walking COS (
n)
Trunk Call Limitation (
o)
Call Transfer (
p)
Door Open (
q)
DISA (
1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
r)
Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) (
1.20.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN
s)
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode (
1.24.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
t)
SMDR for Outgoing Trunk Call (
1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR))
u)
Time Service Switching (
v)
Manager Features (
w)
PT Programming (
Conditions
•
Walking COS
Extension users can make a call from other extensions of the lower level COS by using their own higher level COS temporarily.
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.7 Calling without Restrictions
Feature Guide 283
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2.2
Group
Description
This PBX supports various types of groups.
1.
Trunk Group
Trunks can be grouped into a specified number of trunk groups (e.g., for each carrier, trunk type, etc.) (
LCOT/BRI Trunk Group Number [402]). Several settings can be assigned
on a trunk group basis. All trunks belonging to a trunk group follow the assignment determined for that trunk group.
One trunk can belong to only one trunk group on a port or channel basis.
Port basis: LCOT/DID/E & M/ISDN-BRI/ISDN-PRI23/ISDN-PRI30
Channel basis: E1/T1
2.
User Group
The PBX supports user groups (
User Group [603]), each of which is used to compose
the following groups:
a)
Tenant (
b)
Call Pickup Group (See below.)
c)
Paging Group (See below.)
Every extension must belong to one user group, but cannot belong to more than one user group.
Assignable Extensions: PT/SLT/PS/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX
[Example]
User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4
Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107
2.1 Call Pickup Group (
User Groups of a Pickup Group [650])
Using the Group Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within a specified group. One user group can belong to several call pickup groups.
(
[Example]
Call Pickup Group 1 Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3
User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4
Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107
284 Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2 Paging Group (
User Groups of a Paging Group [640])
Using the Paging feature, extensions can make a page to any paging groups or answer a page to their own groups. One user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups.
(
[Example]
Paging Group 1 Paging Group 2 Paging Group 3 Paging Group 4
User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3
Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Pager 1 Pager 2
3.
Idle Extension Hunting Group
If a called extension is busy or in DND mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group, which can be programmed through system programming (
Idle Extension Hunting Group Member
[681]). Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting
type: Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting (
Idle Extension Hunting Type [680]).
(
4.
Incoming Call Distribution Group
An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group (
Incoming Call Distribution Group Member [620]). Each incoming
call distribution group has a floating extension number (
Group Floating Extension Number [622]) and name ( Incoming Call Distribution Group
Name [623]). One extension can belong to multiple groups.
Assignable Extensions: PT/SLT/PS/ISDN Extension/T1-OPX/PS Ring Group
(
1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features)
[Example]
Incoming Call
Distribution Group 1
(Floating Extn. No. 280,
Name: Sales 1)
Incoming Call
Distribution Group 2
(Floating Extn. No. 290,
Name: Sales 2)
Extn. 103 Extn. 104
Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102
Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107
Feature Guide 285
2.2 System Configuration—Software
5.
VM Group
There are two types of VM groups as follows:
Type
VM (DTMF) Group
VM (DPT) Group
Description
A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF
Integration features.
One SLT port can belong to only one group.
A group of DPT ports (
Number [660]) which use the Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration features.
One DPT port can belong to only one group.
(
[Example]
PBX
DPT
Port
SLT
Port
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
VM (DPT) Group
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
VM (DTMF) Group
VPS
(DPT [Digital] Integration)
VPS
(DTMF Integration)
6.
PS Ring Group
PS ring group is a group of PS extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group. Each group has a floating extension number and name through system programming. One PS can belong to multiple groups.
(
PS Ring Group 1
(Floating Extn. No. 301,
Name: Sales 1)
PS Ring Group 2
(Floating Extn. No. 302,
Name: Sales 2)
PS01
PS02
PS03
PS04
PS05
PS06
286 Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2.3
Tenant Service
Description
This PBX can be shared with certain number of tenants.
1.
Tenant Configuration
1.1 Tenant Member
The tenant members consist of user groups. One user group can belong to only one tenant. Therefore, one extension can belong to only one tenant.
(
1.2 Time Service
Each tenant has a Time Table. The Start and/or End time of each time mode (day/ lunch/break/night) can be set for each day of the week. The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively.
(
[Example]
Tenant 1 Tenant 2
User Group 1
User Group 2
User Group 3
User Group 4
Use Time Table 1
User Group 5
User Group 6
Use Time Table 2
2.
System Management
Each of the following system management items can be assigned to each tenant.
a)
Tenant Operator (extension number/floating extension number of incoming call distribution group/none) (
b)
ARS Mode (Off/Local Access/All Access/System) (
c)
Music Source for Music on Hold (System/BGM Number/Cyclic Tone)
(
Feature Guide 287
2.2 System Configuration—Software
[Programming Example]
Tenant No.
3
:
1
2
Operator
Extn.101
None *1
Floating extn. no. 200
:
ARS Mode
Local Access
System *2
Off
:
Music Source
System *3
Cyclic Tone
BGM1
:
*1
:
Follows the system assignment of a PBX operator (
*2
:
Follows the system assignment of the ARS mode (
*3
:
Follows the system assignment of the music source for the Music on Hold
(
Conditions
•
Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block
The following features can be restricted based on the COS for each extension (not based on the tenant) by the Internal Call Block feature (
– Calling extensions or doorphone(s) in the restricted tenant(s)
– Picking up calls ringing in the restricted tenant(s)
– Retrieving a call held within the restricted tenant(s).
[Example]
Tenant 1
Extension Group 1
Tenant 2
Extension Group 3
COS
1
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
COS
2
Extension Group 2
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Tenant 3
Extension Group 5
COS
5
Extn. 108 Extn. 109
COS
6
Extension Group 6
COS
3
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
COS
4
Extension Group 4
Extn. 106 Extn. 107
Extn. 110 Extn. 111
288 Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
[Programming Example]
Caller
Called Party
COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 4 COS 5 COS 6
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
COS 4
:
COS 5
COS 6
: : : : : :
: Block
Explanation:
1.
Assign each extension in a tenant to a certain COS number. Each tenant must have unique COS numbers.
Tenant 1: COS 1 and COS 2
Tenant 2: COS 3 and COS 4
Tenant 3: COS 5 and COS 6
2.
Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block enables by the Internal Call Block feature.
a)
Tenant 1 (COS 1 and COS 2) can make calls to both Tenant 2 (COS 3 and COS
4) and Tenant 3 (COS 5 and COS 6) as well as Tenant 1.
b)
Tenant 2 (COS 3 and COS 4) can make calls to Tenant 1 (COS 1 and COS 2) and Tenant 2.
c)
Tenant 3 (COS 5 and COS 6) can make calls to Tenant 3 itself only.
• An incoming call distribution group must belong to one tenant because the following features are determined on a tenant basis (
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group
– Music on Hold while a call is waiting in the queue
– The Time Table which determines the overflow destination.
...
...
:
...
...
...
...
...
Feature Guide 289
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2.4
Time Service
Description
This PBX supports day, night, lunch, and break modes of operation. TRS/Barring can be arranged separately. The destination of incoming calls can be set differently for each mode.
1.
Time Service Switching Mode
Day/lunch/break/night mode can be switched either automatically or manually (
Service Switching Mode [101]). The switching mode can be assigned for each tenant.
The switching mode can also be changed by pressing the Time Service Switching Mode
(Automatic/Manual) button. This can be performed by only an extension assigned as the manager, or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis (
Type
Automatic
Manual
Description
The PBX will switch mode according to the preprogrammed Time
Table.
A manager, or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis (
Service Manual Switching [514]) can switch mode by dialling the
feature number or pressing the Time Service button.
Even while in the Automatic Switching mode, day/lunch/break/night mode can be changed manually.
2.
Time Table
Each tenant has a Time Table used for the Automatic Switching mode. The Start and/or
End time of each mode can be set for each day of the week. The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively.
290 Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
[Time Table Example]
Time Schedule
MON
TUE
:
Day 1 start
Lunch start
Day 2 start
Break 1 start
Break 1 end (Day restart)
Night start
Day 1 start
Lunch start
Day 2 start
Break 1 start
Break 1 end (Day restart)
Night start
:
1
08:00
12:00
13:00
NONE
NONE
16:00
08:00
12:05
13:00
NONE
NONE
16:31
:
Time Table No. (Tenant No.)
2 3
11:00
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
20:00
11:00
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
20:00
:
08:00
16:00
NONE
NONE
NONE
12:00
08:00
13:00
NONE
NONE
NONE
17:00
:
4
08:00
12:00
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
08:00
13:00
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
:
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
<Time Service Image of Monday and Tuesday>
Time Table No.
00:00
1
Night
08:00 11:00 12:00 13:00
Day 1
Lunch
Day 2
16:00
2
Night Day 1
3
4
Night
Night
Day 1
Day 1
Night
20:00
Night
24:00
Night
08:00
Day 1
Lunch
Lunch
Day 1
Day 1
3.
Features Using Time Service
The following features can be set in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night):
a)
Destination of incoming trunk calls (DIL/DID/DDI/MSN) (
b)
Destination of the Intercept Routing (
c)
Queuing Time Table for incoming call distribution groups (
d)
Overflow destination for incoming call distribution groups (
e)
Destination of incoming doorphone calls (
f)
PBX operator (
g)
COS for TRS/Barring and for Trunk Access
h)
Outgoing Message (OGM) for Timed Reminder (
i)
Intercept time for Intercept Routing—No Answer (
and for DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (
[Programming Examples of DID/DDI Table and DIL Table]
DID/DDI table can be programmed for each DID/DDI number, and a tenant (Time Table) number is assigned to each DID/DDI number. DIL table can be programmed for each trunk, and a tenant (Time Table) number is assigned to each trunk.
Feature Guide 291
2.2 System Configuration—Software
<DID/DDI Table>
Location DID/DDI
No.
001
002
:
123-4567
123-2468
:
Tenant
(Time
Table) No.
1
1
:
<DIL Table>
Day
105
102
:
DID/DDI Destination
Lunch Break
100 (VPS)
100 (VPS)
:
105
102
:
Night
100 (VPS)
100 (VPS)
:
Trunk No.
01
02
:
Tenant (Time
Table) No.
1
2
:
Day
101
102
:
DIL Destination
Lunch Break
100 (VPS)
100 (VPS)
:
101
102
:
Explanation:
If a trunk call with a DID number (123-4567) is received at 20:00;
1)
Tenant (Time Table) number 1 will be used.
2)
The call is received during night mode in Time Table 1.
3)
The call will be routed to the extension 100 (VPS).
Night
100 (VPS)
100 (VPS)
:
4.
Holiday Mode
The holiday mode activates automatically using the Automatic Switching mode. Up to 24 holidays (start and end dates) can be stored, and one time mode can be selected for all holidays.
5.
Time Service Button
A flexible button can be customised as the following buttons:
a)
Day/Night button
b)
Day/Night/Lunch button
c)
Day/Night/Break button
d)
Day/Night/Lunch/Break button
Each of these buttons is used for switching between modes. For example, pressing the
Day/Night button switches between day and night modes. All of these buttons show the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Off
Status
Day mode
Red on
Night mode
Green on
Lunch mode
Slow green flashing Break mode
Slow red flashing
Holiday mode
292 Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
Note
Any extension user (except extension users allowed to change the mode) can only check the current status on the display by pressing the Time Service button.
Conditions
• PT programming (
Time Service Starting Time [102]) can set the Start and/or End time
of the following:
– Day-1 (Day Start time)
– Lunch (Lunch Start time)
– Day-2 (Lunch End time)
– Night (Night Start time)
PC programming can also set the following three time periods for break mode per day.
– Break-1 Start
– Break-1 End (Day restart)
– Break-2 Start
– Break-2 End (Day restart)
– Break-3 Start
– Break-3 End (Day restart)
•
Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) Button
A flexible button can be customised as the Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/
Manual) button.
Feature Guide References
1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
User Manual References
User Manual
1.7.10 Checking the Time Service Status
2.1.2 Time Service Mode Control
Feature Guide 293
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2.5
Operator Features
Description
This PBX supports a PBX operator and a tenant operator. Any extension and incoming call distribution group can be designated as a PBX and/or a tenant operator.
Type
PBX operator
Tenant operator
Description
An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a PBX operator for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night)
(
An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a tenant operator. The tenant operator may be the extension or incoming call distribution group of another tenant.
[Example] Extension 110 in tenant 1 is the tenant operator of tenant 3.
Operator Call:
An extension user can call an operator with a simple operation. When an operator call is made, the call is routed to the tenant operator. If no tenant operator exists, the call will be routed to the PBX operator. The time mode depends on the tenant of the calling extension. If neither the tenant operator nor the PBX operator exists, the caller will hear reorder tone.
Conditions
• An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as both the tenant and
PBX operator.
• A tenant operator can be assigned for multiple tenants.
Feature Guide References
User Manual References
User Manual
1.2.1 Basic Calling
294 Feature Guide
2.2 System Configuration—Software
2.2.6
Manager Features
Description
An extension assigned as the manager (manager extension) is allowed to use the specified features. COS programming determines the extensions which can use the following manager features (
Feature Description
Manager
Password
Required –
Details in
Manager
Programm ing
Manager
Password
Change
Changes the manager password.
Call
Charge
Managem ent
Sets, sees, clears, and prints the call charge data.
Required
Verified
Code
Personal
Identificati on
Number
(PIN) Set
Sets a verified code PIN for each verified code.
Remote
PIN Clear
Required
Clears the extension PIN of an extension remotely, and a verified code PIN. PIN Lock is also unlocked.
Required
Remote
Extension
Lock
Dial Tone Transfer
Sets or cancels the Extension Lock on an extension remotely.
Changes the TRS/Barring level of the extension temporarily.
[Example] An extension user can call a manager to release the restricted outgoing call (e.g., international call).
Required
Not required
Outgoing Message
(OGM)
Records and plays back outgoing messages (OGMs).
Not required
Time Service
BGM—External
Switches the time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) manually.
Sets the External BGM on and off.
Not required
Not required
Feature Guide 295
2.2 System Configuration—Software
Conditions
WARNING
When a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/ extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)
Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.
b)
Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.
c)
Change the PIN frequently.
•
Manager Password
One manager password can be assigned per PBX (
User Manual References
User Manual
2.1 Control Features
3.2.2 Manager Programming
296 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2.3
System Data Control
2.3.1
PC Programming
Description
This PBX can be programmed and administered using a personal computer (PC). There are two programming methods:
1)
On-site Programming: System programming/diagnosis can be performed locally by connecting a PC to the PBX directly.
2)
Remote Programming: System programming/diagnosis and data upload can be performed from a remote location.
1.
On-site Programming:
Method
Using the Serial
Interface (RS-232C) port
Description
The PBX has a Serial Interface (RS-232C) port which can be used for either system administration or SMDR (
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
Using the USB port
The PC is connected to the USB port on the PBX, or a USB port (USB Module) attached to a DPT.
A CTI-LINK card must be installed.
Using the LAN interface (KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
Using a modem through an SLT port*
(KX-TDA30/KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
An RMT card must be installed. Assign the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance (
Floating Extension Number [811]), and dial this number from
the PC to connect to the PBX.
Using an ISDN TA interface (64 kbps) through an ISDN
Extension Line*
Assign the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance (
ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number
[812]), and dial this number from the PC to connect to the
PBX. The RMT card is not required for this method.
This method is available only when a user-supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI is used.
*: If remote access is disabled through system programming (
Programming [810]), then this on site programming cannot be done.
Feature Guide 297
2.3 System Data Control
2.
Remote Programming:
Method Description
Using a modem
(RMT card)
An RMT card must be installed. The floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance must be assigned (
Floating Extension Number [811]).
PC programming, using a telephone connected in parallel with the modem, can be done in the following ways:
•
Direct Access
Dial the DIL/DID/DDI number whose destination is the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance.
•
Through DISA
Dial the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance using the DISA feature. (
•
Call Transfer
Call an extension (probably the operator), and request a transfer to the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance. (
Using an external modem
(Not RMT card)
An external modem can be used instead of an RMT card to perform the remote programming. An external modem can be connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) of the PBX. Connect the modem to an extension port which is assigned as the DIL/DID/DDI/MSN destination or to a trunk directly to connect to the PBX from the PC.
An AT command can be sent to the modem automatically when it is connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port. AT commands can be programmed beforehand through system programming to initialise the modem. An AT command can also be sent manually in the PT system programming mode (
Using an ISDN
TA interface (64 kbps) through an ISDN Trunk
The floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance must be assigned (
ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number
[812]), and dial the DIL/DID/DDI/MSN number whose destination is
the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance.
The RMT card is not required for this method.
This method is available only when an user-supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI is used.
Conditions
• Access to system programming is allowed only one at a time.
•
Programmer Code and Password for System Programming
To access system programming, a programmer code and its password must be entered.
There are three programmer codes, which are set at the factory. Each programmer code has a unique password which is also set at the factory.
Programmer codes can be changed using the Maintenance Console, by selecting
"Programmer Code Change" from the "Tool" menu. Passwords can be changed through system programming. If the wrong password is entered a preprogrammed number of times
(Default: None [no limitation]) remotely, access will be locked and can only be unlocked by enabling remote access through system programming (
298 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
Programmer
Code
Installer Level
Programmer
Code
Administrator
Level
Programmer
Code
User Level
Programmer
Code
Password
System Password for Installer
Description
All system programming is accessible.
System Password for Administrator— for PC Programming
Permitted system programming is accessible. Each system programming can be determined whether to be accessed by the administrator.
System Password for User—for PC
Programming
Permitted system programming is accessible. Each system programming can be determined whether to be accessed by the end users.
•
Remote Programming Limitation
It is possible to disable remote access through system programming (
• If an extension user sets the Walking Extension feature while the extension data (e.g.,
Headset mode) is programmed through PC programming, some extension data for the user may not be transferred properly.
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.3.1 MPR Card
2.3.3 RMT Card
2.6.6 CTI-LINK Card
3.1 Overview — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
3.2 Connection — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
3.3 Installation of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console — KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.5.7 RMT Card
7.1 Overview — KX-TDA30
7.2 Connection — KX-TDA30
7.3 Installation of the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console
Feature Guide References
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
Feature Guide 299
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.2
PT Programming
Description
A PT user can perform the following programming:
a)
Personal Programming: Customising the extension according to his needs.
b)
System Programming: Customising the PBX according to organisational needs.
c)
Manager Programming: Customising specified frequently changing items (e.g.,
Charge Management and Remote Extension Lock).
Conditions
• COS programming determines what programming can be performed (
– System programming and personal programming
– Personal programming only
– No programming
• The extension which is connected to the lowest numbered extension port can perform both personal programming and system programming regardless of the COS.
• The extension(s) assigned as the manager COS can perform manager programming.
• During programming, the PT is considered to be busy.
• Access to system programming and manager programming is allowed only one at a time.
However, one PBX supports up to 16 simultaneous programmers (one system programmer + 15 personal programmers, one manager programmer + 15 personal programmers, or 16 personal programmers).
•
System Programming Password Level
To access system programming, a valid password must be entered. There are two types of passwords, which are set at the factory, and can be changed through system programming.
Type Description
System Password for Administrator— for PT Programming
All system programming available for PT programming is accessible (
System Password for Administrator—for PT
System Password for User—for PT
Programming
Permitted system programming is accessible (
Password for User—for PT Programming [111]). Each access to
system programming can be controlled.
•
Personal Programming Data Default Set
A user can return all of the items programmed on the telephone to default.
Feature Guide References
300 Feature Guide
User Manual References
User Manual
3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming)
3.2 Manager Programming
3.3 Customising Your System (System Programming)
2.3 System Data Control
Feature Guide 301
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.3
Quick Setup
Description
It is possible to set up the basic PBX parameters using a personal computer (PC). When a PC accesses the PBX for the first time with the Installer Level Programmer Code (
Programming), Quick Setup display will appear automatically. The following items can be
programmed as desired:
Date & Time
Set
Item Parameter
Year/Month/
Date/Hour/
Minute
Description
The date and time set on the PC will be used.
System
Password for
Installer
4–10 characters Enter the system password for installer.
Operator &
Manager
Extension
Number
Assign the PBX operator to all time modes (day/lunch/ break/night) (
extension assigned as the PBX operators is automatically allowed to perform manager operation (
Flexible
Numbering
Type
1. Pattern 1
(with )
2. Pattern 2
(without )
If "
Pattern 1
(with )" is selected, " " must prefix all feature numbers (except access numbers) when an extension user wants to use a feature.
[Example] Call Pickup feature number
Pattern 1 (with ): 41
Pattern 2 (without ): 41
Operator/
Local Access
Remote
Maintenance
Number
1. 0/9
2. 9/0
For default of the flexible numbers, refer to the [Flexible
Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]
(
2.3.5 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering).
The feature numbers for Operator Call and Idle Line
Access can be selected. They will be "0" or "9".
Remote
Maintenance Dial
Number
Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX
(including the country code). When necessary, this number will be used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes.
302 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.4
Automatic Setup
Description
There are two automatic setup features as follows:
1) Automatic ISDN Configuration
2) Automatic Time Adjustment
1.
Automatic ISDN Configuration
The ISDN (BRI) port configuration can be set automatically through system programming.
The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN (BRI) port:
a)
L1 Active Mode
b)
L2 Data Link Mode
c)
Access Mode (Point-to Point/Point-to-Multipoint)
d)
TEI Assignment Mode (Fix 00–63/Automatic)
2.
Automatic Time Adjustment
It is possible to adjust the PBX clock automatically in the following two ways:
a)
Summer Time (Daylight Saving Time) Setting:
The start and end dates of the summer time can be programmed. The PBX clock will be adjusted (one hour forward or backward) at 2:00AM of the programmed date, if enabled through system programming. It means 2:00 AM will become 3:00 AM on the start date of the summer time, and 2:00 AM will become 1:00 AM on the end date.
Note
If the Timed Reminder (Wake-up call) is set;
– On the summer time start date, the setting between 2:00 AM and 3:00 AM will not happen.
– On the summer time end date, the setting between 1:00 AM and 2:00 AM will ring twice.
b)
Time Information from Telephone Company:
Time information can be received on the following calls:
• An incoming or outgoing call through an ISDN line
• An incoming call through an analogue line with Caller ID which includes the time information.
The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday with the first call after 3:05 AM, if enabled through system programming.
Note
If the Timed Reminder (Wake-up call) is set, the setting will not happen or will ring twice depending on the adjustment.
Conditions
• SMDR will record the call information using the PBX clock so that the recording time will be overlapped at the end of summer time. (
1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording
Feature Guide 303
2.3 System Data Control
Feature Guide References
1.20.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
304 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.5
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Description
To dial another extension user or to access PBX features, the access numbers (extension numbers or feature numbers) are required.
There are three types of numbering plans:
1) Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)
2) Flexible Numbering (available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)
3) Fixed Numbering (available while dialling or talking)
1.
Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)
Extension numbers and feature numbers which are available while a dial tone is heard can be customised for easy use (
Flexible Numbering [100]). The numbers must not conflict.
It is also possible to use default (Pattern 1 or Pattern 2) shown in the following table:
a)
Extension Numbers (Extension Numbering Scheme 1 through 32): Up to fourdigit number (up to two-digit leading number consisting of "0 through 9" ) + additional digits (up to two digits, default: two digits)
[Example]
If the number "3" as a leading number for the 1st extension numbering scheme and the "2" as an additional digit have been programmed, the extension number 300 through 399 are available.
b)
Feature Numbers: Up to four-digit number consisting of "0 through 9", " ", and "#"
c)
Other PBX Extension Numbers (Other PBX Extension Number [TIE] -1 through
16): Up to three-digit number consisting of "0 through 9", " ", and "#"
[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]
Feature
Pattern 1
(with )
1 / 2
Default
Pattern 2
(without )
11
Extension Numbering Scheme 1—Leading
Number
Extension Numbering Scheme 2—Leading
Number
Extension Numbering Scheme 3—Leading
Number
Extension Numbering Scheme 4—Leading
Number
Extension Numbering Scheme 5—Leading
Number
Extension Numbering Scheme 6—Leading
Number
2 / 3
3 / 4
4 / 5
5 / 6
6 / None
12
13
14
15
16
Feature Guide 305
2.3 System Data Control
Feature
Extension Numbering Scheme 7–32—Leading
Number
Operator Call
Idle Line Access (Local Access)
Trunk Group Access
TIE Line Access
Redial
Speed Dialling—System/Personal
Personal Speed Dialling—Programming
Doorphone Call
Broadcasting
Group Paging
External BGM on/off
Outgoing Message (OGM) playback/record/ clear
S-CO Line Access
Parallel Telephone Mode set/cancel
Group Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
TAFAS—Calls through an External Pager
Group Paging answer
Automatic Callback Busy cancel/CCBS cancel
User Remote Operation/Walking COS/Verified
Code Entry
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set/cancel
Account Code Entry
Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve
Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Holding
Extension Number
Call Park/Call Park Retrieve
Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Held Trunk
Number
Pattern 1
(with )
Default
Pattern 2
(without )
None None
9 / 0
0 / 9
*
8
7
#
9 / 0
0 / 9
8
None
#
deleted: 4
41
42
43
46
47
37
39
40
48
49
50
51
30
31
32
33
35
36
52
53
42
43
46
47
37
39
40
41
30
31
32
33
35
36
48
49
50
51
52
53
306 Feature Guide
Feature
Door Open
External Feature Access
ISDN Hold
COLR set/cancel
CLIR set/cancel
Switch CLIP/COLP of the Trunk/Extension
MCID
ISDN-FWD set/cancel/confirm
Message Waiting set/cancel/callback
FWD/DND set/cancel—Both
FWD/DND set/cancel—External
FWD/DND set/cancel—Internal
FWD/DND No Answer Timer set
Group FWD set/cancel—Both
Group FWD set/cancel—External
Group FWD set/cancel—Internal
Call Pickup Deny set/cancel
Paging Deny set/cancel
Walking Extension
Data Line Security set/cancel
Call Waiting for Intercom Calls set/cancel
Call Waiting for Trunk Calls (including doorphone calls, calls for an incoming call distribution group) set/cancel
Executive Busy Override Deny set/cancel
Not Ready Mode on/off
Log-in/Log-out
Incoming Call Queue Monitor
Hot Line programme/set/cancel
Absent Message set/cancel
2.3 System Data Control
Pattern 1
(with )
Default
Pattern 2
(without )
55
55
60
60
62
62
7 0 7 0
7 1
7 2
7 3
7 5
7 1
7 2
7 3
7 5
70
70
710
711
712
710
711
712
713
713
714
715
716
720
714
715
716
720
721
727
730
731
732
721
727
730
731
732
733
735
736
739
740
750
733
735
736
739
740
750
Feature Guide 307
2.3 System Data Control
Feature
BGM set/cancel
Timed Reminder set/cancel
Extension Lock set/cancel
Time Service Switch
Remote Extension Lock off
Remote Extension Lock on
Extension Feature Clear
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) set/cancel
Dial Information (CTI)
Other PBX Extension Number (TIE) 1–16
Quick Dialling 1–80
Pattern 1
(with )
Default
Pattern 2
(without )
751
751
760
760
77
77
780
780
782
782
783
783
790
799
None
None
None
790
799
None
None
None
* : For users in New Zealand, the default value of Idle Line Access (Local Access) is "1".
2.
Flexible Numbering (available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)
Feature numbers which are available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard can be customised for easy use. The numbers should be one digit ("0 through 9" , " ", or "#" ) and must not conflict. For default, refer to the following table:
[Flexible Numbering Table (available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)]
Feature
Call Waiting/DND Override
Default
1 or 2* deleted:
KX-T7710 MESSAGE Button
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling 1–8
Executive Busy Override
Message Waiting set
Call Monitor
Automatic Callback Busy/CCBS
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
3
4
5
6
*1: For users in Germany, France,
Belgium, Norway, Sweden,
Denmark, Finland,
Portugal, Italy, and New Zealand
*2: For users in the United Kingdom
*3: For users in other countries/areas
*: To use Call Waiting/DND Override, both "1" and "2" are available by default.
3.
Fixed Numbering (available while dialling or talking)
The features which are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers as shown in the following table:
308 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
[Fixed Numbering Table (available while dialling or talking)]
Feature Fixed
Numbering
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Conference
Door Open
3
5
Conditions
• The PBX has default for numbers.
• The following are examples of feature number conflicts: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32 and 321, etc.
•
Feature number + Additional number (Parameter)
Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set Call Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same feature number should be followed by "0".
• If a feature number includes " " or "#", rotary SLT users cannot use it.
• ISDN extension users cannot use the following features:
– OGM playback/record
– Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve (held at its own extension)
– ISDN Hold
– MCID
– Walking Extension
– Call Waiting
– Hot Line
– Timed Reminder
– Executive Busy Override
– Call Monitor
– Automatic Callback Busy/CCBS
• PS users cannot use the following features:
– Personal Speed Dialling
– OGM playback/record
– S-CO Line Access
– Parallel Telephone Mode set/cancel
– Walking Extension
– BGM set/cancel
– Timed Reminder
User Manual References
User Manual
4.2.1 Feature Number Table
Feature Guide 309
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.6
Floating Extension
Description
Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them appear as extensions.
These numbers are defined as floating extension numbers and can be assigned as a destination of incoming calls etc.
This feature is also known as Floating Station.
Device
Group
Resource
External Pager
Description
Used as the destination for TAFAS feature (
Pager Floating Extension Number [700]). (
Answer From Any Station (TAFAS))
Outgoing Message
(OGM)
Used to send messages for DISA feature (
Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730]). (
1.16.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA))
Analogue Remote
Maintenance (KX-
TDA30/KX-
TDA100/KX-
TDA200 only)
ISDN Remote
Maintenance
Used to access the PC programming mode through a modem on a personal computer (
Used to access the PC programming mode through the
ISDN interface on a personal computer (
Floating Extension Number [812]).
Incoming Call
Distribution Group
Used to call an incoming call distribution group (
Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension
1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution
PS Ring Group
VM (DPT) Group
Used to call a PS ring group. (
Used to call a VM (DPT) group (
VM (DTMF) Group
Used to call a VM (DTMF) group.
Conditions
• It is possible to give names to floating extension numbers (
Group Name [623], Outgoing Message (OGM) Name [731]).
Feature Guide References
310 Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2.3.7
Software Upgrading
Description
It is possible to upload software from a personal computer to the PBX to upgrade the following:
Data File
Main Processing (MPR) software data
Storage Area
Operating system data area on either the
MPR card of the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, or the Main Board of the KX-TDA15/KX-
TDA30.
Default data of system programming for each country/ area
Country/area data area on the MPR card or
Main Board
Language data for PT display Each language data area on the MPR card or Main Board.
There are two types:
Type 1: PT display except for PT system programming (
(five languages max.)
Type 2: PT system programming data (one language max.)
LPR (software on a slot card) software data (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200 only)
Flash ROM on the slot card (e.g., BRI8)
Cell Station (CS) software data Flash ROM on the CS
Conditions
• The software version of the MPR can be confirmed through system programming (
Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference [190]).
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.3.1 MPR Card
Feature Guide 311
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4
Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4.1
Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200 only)
Description
When the power supply to the PBX fails, specific SLTs and/or ISDN terminal devices are automatically connected to specific trunks (Power Failure Connections). The PBX will switch from normal operation to the Power Failure Connections, and all existing conversations will be disconnected.
Only the trunks handled by Power Failure Connections can be used during a power failure.
Conditions
[General]
• Only trunk calls can be made during a power failure. All other features do not work.
•
DC Power Source
If the DC power is available from backup batteries, even if the AC power fails, the PBX will remain fully operational.
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
• The analogue trunk cards and extension cards and the number of ports which can be used for Power Failure Connections are as follows:
Trunk Cards: LCOT16 (four ports), LCOT8 (two ports), and LCOT4 (two ports)
Extension Cards: MSLC16 (four ports), SLC16 (four ports), DHLC8 (two ports) and SLC8
(two ports).
To each trunk card, connect only one extension card.
Note
Power Failure Connections between analogue trunk cards and extension cards should be done as per system programming so that conversation is maintained when the power is restored and the MPR is recovering.
• The BRI8 (one port) and BRI4 (one port) cards can also be used for Power Failure
Connections. For details about Power Failure Connections, refer to the Installation Manual.
[KX-TDA30]
• Ports 1 and 2 of the LCOT card installed in the least slot number and ports 1 and 2 of the
Super Hybrid ports can be used for Power Failure Connections.
Note
The Power Failure Connections between the LCOT card and Super Hybrid ports are automatically kept so that the conversation is maintained when the power is restored and the Main Board is recovering.
312 Feature Guide
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
• The BRI2 (one port) card can also be used for Power Failure Connections. For details about Power Failure Connections, refer to the Installation Manual.
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
2.2.6 Backup Batteries Connection
2.12.1 Power Failure Connections
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
6.2.6 Backup Batteries Connection
6.11.1 Power Failure Connections
Feature Guide 313
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4.2
Power Failure Restart
Description
When turning the electricity back on, the PBX restarts the stored data automatically and the
PBX will record the event (System Restart) in the error log.
Conditions
• In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-provided lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy
(Camp-on) (
1.7.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)) and Call Park (
314 Feature Guide
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4.3
Local Alarm Information
Description
When a PBX error occurs and the PBX detects it, the System Alarm button light on the PT of an extension, which is allowed to use this feature through system programming (a maximum of two extensions per PBX), turns on red. Pressing the button will show the error number on the display. If multiple errors occur, the error number will be displayed in order of highest priority to lowest. The System Alarm button light turns off automatically after all error numbers have been displayed.
For details about the errors and their solutions, refer to the Installation Manual.
[Error Example]
ERR #100 (10000)
(1) (2)
[Explanation]
Number in the
Example
(1)
(2)
Item
Error Code
Sub Code
Description
Shows three-digit error code.
Shows five-digit sub code (XYYZZ).
X: Cabinet number (1–4)
YY: Slot number (00–11)
ZZ: Physical port number (01–16)
Conditions
•
System Alarm Button
A flexible button can be customised as the System Alarm button.
• If an extension allowed to utilise this feature uses a PC Console or PC Phone, the alarm information will be displayed on the PC.
• If an extension allowed to utilise this feature uses a PC Console or PC Phone, the alarm information will be sent to the preprogrammed party via the PC Console or PC Phone. The
PC Console and PC Phone use e-mail to send the information.
• The alarm information will be recorded on the SMDR, if enabled through system programming.
• The PBX can be automatically diagnosed at a preprogrammed time everyday.
Feature Guide 315
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
Installation Manual References
Installation Manual
<KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200>
4.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log
<KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30>
8.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log
Feature Guide References
1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
316 Feature Guide
Section 3
Programming Instructions
Feature Guide 317
3.1 Introduction
3.1
Introduction
3.1.1
Introduction
These Programming Instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX. The PBX has a default setting. You can change the default to meet your requirements. System programming controls the PBX features described in this Feature Guide. It allows the PBX to be customised to the requirements. Only one person can programme at a time. Another person trying to enter programming mode will be rejected.
Ways to Programme
There are two programming methods:
•
PC (Personal Computer) Programming
All system programming can be performed. PC programming is described in Section
•
PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming
A subset of system programming can be performed. PT programming is described in
Section 3.3 PT Programming. The extension user can programme by entering 3 digits
programming numbers from the PT.
Password Security
A password is required to perform programming for security purposes. Do not disclose the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud.
Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password
1.
Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers.
2.
Please maintain the secrecy of the password. This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud.
3.
Please change the password periodically.
4.
We strongly recommend that a password of 10 digits is used for maximum protection against hackers.
5.
If the system password is forgotten, you can examine the backup of the system programming. Therefore, please keep your backup secure to avoid unauthorised access.
• If you have a backup of the system data, you can find the password by loading the backup system data onto the PC and check the password using the programming tool. For how to back up the system data, refer to Section 3.3.4
Hybrid IP-PBX Maintenance (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 7.3.4 Hybrid IP-
PBX Maintenance (for KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30) in the Installation Manual.
• If you do not have a backup system data, you have to set the PBX to the factory default and reprogramme it. Therefore, we recommend that you back up the system data.
318 Feature Guide
3.2 PC Programming
3.2
PC Programming
3.2.1
Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console
To programme and administer the PBX by personal computer (PC), you need to install the
Maintenance Console (KX-TDA Maintenance Console for the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 or KX-
TDA30 Maintenance Console for the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30) onto the computer.
This section briefly describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are connected by USB cable. The screenshots shown in the installation procedure are based on the KX-TDA Maintenance Console.
System Requirements
Operating System
• Microsoft
®
Windows
®
98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
Hardware
• CPU: Intel ® Pentium ® 133 MHz or better microprocessor
• RAM: at least 64 megabytes (MB) of free RAM (128 MB recommended)
• HDD: at least 100 MB of hard disc space
Feature Guide 319
3.2 PC Programming
Installing the Maintenance Console and Selecting the Appropriate
Country/Area Data
1.
a.
Save the setup file of the Maintenance
Console on your PC.
b.
Double-click the icon to execute the setup file.
c.
Follow the instructions of the wizard.
2.
a.
Type the appropriate Country Code.
The Maintenance Console will be installed with the appropriate default data for your country/area.
b.
Click [Next].
c.
Follow the instructions of the wizard.
d.
Click [Finish].
e.
Click [OK].
Notes
• To install or uninstall the software into Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP
Professional, the user must be grouped either of "Administrators" or "Power Users".
• To connect the PC to the PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must have been installed. Follow the instructions of the wizard to install the KX-TDA USB driver.
• The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.
Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items
(Quick Setup)
When you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the PBX for the first time after initialisation (with the factory default setting), Quick
Setup will launch automatically. For details about Quick Setup items, refer to Section 2.3.3
1. Connect the PC to the PBX with a USB cable.
2. Start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console or
KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console from the start menu.
320 Feature Guide
3.2 PC Programming
3. Type the Installer Level Programmer Code
(default: 1234), then click [OK].
The Programmer Code authorises different programming levels, and the Quick Setup is only available when you start the
Maintenance Console with the Installer Level
Programmer Code.
Note
There are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited authorisation: Administrator
Level (default: 1111), and User Level
(default: none).
5. Type the system password for installer
(default: 1234), then click [OK] to log-in.
Feature Guide 321
3.2 PC Programming
6. When country/area data do not match: a.
Click [OK] to replace the country/area data of the PBX. Replacement may take several minutes to complete.
b.
Follow the procedure described in
Section 2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-
PBX (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or
6.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX (for
KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30) in the Installation
Manual and restart the PBX.
c.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to restart the
Maintenance Console.
7. Follow the instructions of the wizard and assign the basic items (Quick Setup).
The programme menu appears.
Notice
1.
During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data to the SD Memory Card. You can think of system data as stored in RAM, whereas SD Memory Card as stored on a hard disk. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or system reset for some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost.
To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the Maintenance
Console so that the PBX starts automatically saving the system data.
2.
When the PBX is initialised, not all data is taken from the SD Memory Card. The data for present status of extension FWD/DND buttons is taken from battery backup memory in the PBX.
322 Feature Guide
3.2 PC Programming
3.
The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system standby mode while the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX.
To perform either of the operations above, first close the connection to the PBX.
CAUTION
Do not remove the SD Memory Card during access to it. Doing so will damage the system data, and in the worst case, damage the SD Memory Card.
Feature Guide 323
3.3 PT Programming
3.3
PT Programming
3.3.1
Programming Instructions
Required Telephone/Extension
A PT with multiline display (e.g., KX-T7636 6-line display) is required for the system programming. The extension must be in a COS permitted System Programming or the extension connected to the smallest port number.
System programming allows only one extension user to enter at a time.
Buttons and Functions
T7600
Fixed Buttons
T7200/T7400/T7500
REDIAL
Function
PREVIOUS
SP-PHONE
FWD/DND
NEXT
(Page up)
(Page down)
CONF
AUTO DIAL
STORE
HOLD
TRANSFER
AUTO ANS
MUTE
PROGRAM
MESSAGE
PAUSE
FLASH/
RECALL
INTERCOM
SHIFT
ENTER
Back to Previous Menu
(CANCEL)
SHIFT
END
CLEAR
SELECT
PROGRAM
FLASH
SECRET
324 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Entering System Programming Mode
System programming enables the extension user to set the time, call destination and all sorts of system conditions within the limits of available programming. The administrator or manager can also set up desired parameters for user programming. It is necessary to enter the relevant password to start programming. Programming has two levels: Administrator Level and User
Level.
Administrator Level:
All system programming available for PT programming is accessible.
PROGRAM/
PAUSE
System Password for Administrator
#
—for PT Programming
= 1234
Programming No.
3 digits
User Level:
Permitted system programming is accessible. Each access to system programming can be controlled.
PROGRAM/
PAUSE
System Password for User
—for PT Programming
= 1234
Note
means default value throughout this manual.
Programming Structure
Programming No.
3 digits
Programming
Number
Programming Group Title
[0XX] Basic Programming
Description
Frequently used programming steps.
[1XX]
[2XX]
System Programming
Time Programming
Global system parameters.
Flexible system timers.
[3XX]
[4XX]
[5XX]
[6XX]
[7XX]
[8XX]
[9XX]
TRS/Barring/ARS
Programming
Trunk Programming
TRS/Barring and Automatic Route
Selection (ARS).
Setting of trunk, trunk group, or BRI line features.
COS Programming Class of Service parameters.
Extension Programming Assignment of the extension features
Resource/Interface
Programming
SMDR & Maintenance
Programming
Card Programming
Assignment of the various interfaces on the PBX.
Setting of SMDR and maintenance features.
The programming used to refer to or delete the card.
Feature Guide 325
3.3 PT Programming
Entering Characters
To store a name or message, you can enter the following characters. Those tables show you the characters available on each button.
Table 1 (Standard mode)
Times
Buttons
1 2 3 4
1
!
?
" 1
2
A
5 6 7
B C a b c 2
3
D E F d e f 3
4
G H I g h i 4
5
J K L j k l 5
6
M N O m n o 6
7
P
8 9
Q R S p q r s 7
8
T U V t u v 8
9
0
W X Y Z w x y z 9
(space) .
, ' : ; 0
#
/ + — = < >
$ % & @ ( )
£
#
Table 2 (Option mode)
Times
Buttons
1 2 3 4
1
!
?
" ä
2
A
5
ö
6
ü
7
1
B C a b c À
3
D E F d e f Ð
4
G H I g h i Ì
5
J K L j k l 5
6
M N O m n o Ñ
7
P
8
Q R S p q r s
9
Š
10 11 12 13 14 15
Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç 2
È É Ê Ë 3
Í Î Ï 4
Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö Ø Œ 6
ß 7
8
T U V t u v Ù Ú Û Ü 8
9
ý Z 9
0
W X Y Z w x y z
(space)
.
, ' : ; 0
/ + — = < >
#
$ % & @ ( ) £ #
326 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Table 2 (Option mode for CE model)
Times
Buttons
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
!
?
" ä ö ü 1
2
A B C a b c
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Á Â Ã Ä Ç C 2
3
D E F d e f D
Ð
É E
A
C
Ë e 3
4
G H I g h i Í Î 4
5
J K L j k l L ’ L 5
6
M N O m n o N N Ó Ô Õ Ö 6
7
P Q R S p q r s R R Š S S ß 7
8
Ü 8
9
0
T
W
U
X
V
Y t
Z u v T T u
’ w x y z
Ú U
Z Z Z
(space)
.
, ' : ; 0
ý 9
#
/ + — = < >
$ % & @ ( )
£
#
Table 2 (Option mode for GR model)
Times
Buttons
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
!
?
" 1
2
B
Γ
2
3
A
∆
E Z 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
H
K
N
Π
T
X
Θ
Λ
Ξ
I
M
O
Ψ â„¦
4
5
6
P
Σ
7
Y
Φ
8
9
0
(space) .
, ' : ; 0
#
/ + — = < >
$ % & @ ( ) £ #
Feature Guide 327
3.3 PT Programming
Table 2 (Option mode for RU model)
Times
Buttons
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
2
10 11
8
9
6
7
3
4
5
0
#
(space)
/ + — = < >
$ % & @ ( ) #
[Example of Entering Characters]
To enter "Ann":
n
A
2
6
(5 times)
OR
FWD/DND n
6
(5 times)
Notes
• To erase the character on the cursor, press CLEAR.
• To move the cursor to the left, press .
• To move the cursor to the right, press .
• If SELECT is pressed, the characters for each button will bring out in reverse order.
• To toggle between Table 1 and Table 2 when using KX-T7600 series, press the leftmost soft button.
328 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.2
Basic Programming
Date & Time [000]
[In 12-hour Format]
[000]
NEXT
ENTER
Hour
01–12
Year
00–99
Month
01–12
Date
01–31
ENTER
Minute
00–59
SELECT
(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)
AM/PM
ENTER
END
(HOLD)
[In 24-hour Format]
[000]
ENTER
Year
00–99
Month
01–12
Date
01–31
ENTER
NEXT
Hour
00–23
Minute
00–59
ENTER
END
(HOLD)
System Speed Dialling Number [001]
[001]
ENTER
Speed Dialling No.
000–999
Telephone No.
Max. 32 digits
To the Next Speed Dialling No.
To the Desired Speed Dialling No.
ENTER
END
NEXT
CANCEL
System Speed Dialling Name [002]
[002]
ENTER
Speed Dialling No.
000–999
Name
Max. 20 characters
ENTER
END
Extension Number [003]
[003]
Current Extn. No.
1–4 digits
ENTER
New Extn. No.
1–4 digits
ENTER
END
Feature Guide 329
3.3 PT Programming
Note
If a PC Phone, PC Console or CTI application software is running on the PC that is connected to the PBX, quit it before this programme.
Extension Name [004]
[004]
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
END
ENTER
Name
Max. 20 characters
ENTER
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) [005]
[005]
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
PIN
Max. 10 digits
END
ENTER ENTER
WARNING
When a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/ extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)
Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.
b)
Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.
c)
Change the PIN frequently.
Operator Assignment [006]
[006]
[007]
ENTER
ENTER
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
Console Paired Telephone [007]
Console No.
01–08
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
END
ENTER deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
ENTER
END
Note
This programme is available after the port connected to the Console is assigned as
"Console" in Terminal Device Assignment [601].
Absent Message [008]
[008]
ENTER
Location No.
1–8
Message
Max. 16 characters
ENTER
END
330 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Charge Margin [010]
[010]
ENTER
Margin XX.YY%
2+2 decimal places
Charge Tax [011]
[011]
ENTER
Location No.
01–03
ENTER
Tax XX.YY%
2+2 decimal places
END
ENTER
Charge Rate per Unit [012]
[012]
Trunk Group No.
01–64
ENTER
Charge Rate
Max. 8 digits including decimal point
ENTER
END
END
Feature Guide 331
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.3
System Programming
Flexible Numbering [100]
[100]
ENTER
Location No.
01–36
Feature No.
1–4 digits
To the Desired Location No.
To the Next Location No.
ENTER
NEXT
CANCEL
END
(HOLD)
Time Service Switching Mode [101]
[101]
ENTER
SELECT
(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)
Manual/Automatic ENTER
Time Service Starting Time [102]
[In 12-hour Format]
[102]
ENTER
Day No.
0 Sun/1 Mon/
2 Tue/3 Wed/
4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat
Hour:Minute
01:00–12:59
SELECT
AM/PM
Time No.
1 Day-1/2 Lunch/
3 Day-2/4 Night
ENTER
To the Next Time No.
To the Next Day No.
END
END
NEXT
Page up
[In 24-hour Format]
[102]
ENTER
Day No.
Time No.
0 Sun/1 Mon/
2 Tue/3 Wed/
4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat
1 Day-1/2 Lunch/
3 Day-2/4 Night
Hour:Minute
00:00–23:59
ENTER
To the Next Time No.
To the Next Day No.
END
NEXT
Page up
332 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Idle Line Access (Local Access) [103]
[103]
Location No.
01–64
ENTER
Trunk Group No.
01–64
ENTER
END
System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming [110]
[110]
ENTER
Password
4–10 digits
1234
ENTER
END
System Password for User—for PT Programming [111]
[111]
ENTER
Password
4–10 digits
1234
ENTER
END
Manager Password [112]
[112]
ENTER
Password
4–10 digits
1234
Verified Code [120]
[120]
ENTER
Location No.
0001–1000
ENTER
END
Verified Code
1–4 digits
ENTER
END
Verified Code Name [121]
[121]
ENTER
Location No.
0001–1000
Name
Max. 20 characters
ENTER
END
Verified Code Personal Identification Number (PIN) [122]
[122]
Location No.
0001–1000
PIN
Max. 10 digits
END
ENTER ENTER
WARNING
When a third party discovers the personal identification number (PIN) (verified code PIN/ extension PIN) of the PBX, there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls
Feature Guide 333
3.3 PT Programming using the telephone line, and the cost will be charged to your own account. In order to avoid this problem, we strongly recommend the following points: a)
Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN.
b)
Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it.
c)
Change the PIN frequently.
Verified Code COS Number [123]
[123]
Location No.
0001–1000
ENTER
COS No.
01–64
Decimal Point Position for Currency [130]
[130]
Desired No.
0–7
ENTER ENTER
END
ENTER
END
Currency [131]
[131]
ENTER
Currency
3 characters
END
ENTER
Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference [190]
[190]
MPR Version
Reference only
END
ENTER
334 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.4
Time Programming
Hold Recall Time [200]
[200]
Time
0–240 s
ENTER ENTER
END
(HOLD)
Transfer Recall Time [201]
[201]
Time
1–240 s
ENTER ENTER
END
Intercept Time [203]
[203]
ENTER
1 Day/2 Lunch
3 Break/4 Night
Hot Line Waiting Time [204]
[204]
Time
0–15 s
ENTER ENTER
Time
1–240 s
END
ENTER
Automatic Redial Repeat Times [205]
[205]
Number of Times
0–15
ENTER
Automatic Redial Interval [206]
ENTER
END
END
[206]
ENTER
Time
(1–120) ×10 s
ENTER
Door Open Duration Time [207]
[207]
Time
2–7 s
ENTER ENTER
END
END
Feature Guide 335
3.3 PT Programming
Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT [208]
[208]
Time
0–60 s
END
ENTER ENTER
DISA Delayed Answer Time [209]
[209]
Time
0–30 s
ENTER ENTER
END
DISA Trunk-to-Trunk Call Prolong Time [210]
[210]
Time
0–7 min
END
ENTER ENTER
DISA Intercept Time [211]
[211]
ENTER
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch
3 Break/4 Night
Time
0–60 s
ENTER
END
336 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.5
TRS/Barring/ARS Programming
TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling [300]
[300]
ENTER
SELECT
(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)
Disable/Enable
ENTER
END
(HOLD)
TRS/Barring Denied Code [301]
[301]
ENTER
Level No.
2–6
Location No.
001–100
Denied Code
Max. 16 digits
To the Next Location No.
To the Desired Location No.
ENTER
END
NEXT
CANCEL
TRS/Barring Exception Code [302]
[302]
ENTER
Level No.
2–6
Location No.
001–100
Exception Code
Max. 16 digits
ENTER
END
Special Carrier Access Code [303]
[303]
Location No.
01–20
ENTER
Carrier Access Code
Max. 16 digits
Emergency Number [304]
[304]
Location No.
01–10
ENTER
Emergency No.
Max. 32 digits
ENTER
ENTER
END
END
ARS Mode [320]
[320]
ENTER
SELECT
Off/Idle Line/
All Access ENTER
END
Feature Guide 337
3.3 PT Programming
ARS Leading Number [321]
[321]
Location No.
0001–1000
ENTER
Leading No.
Max. 16 digits
ARS Routing Plan Table Number [322]
[322]
Location No.
0001–1000
ENTER
Plan Table No.
01–16
ARS Exception Number [325]
[325]
Location No.
001–200
ENTER
Exception No.
Max. 16 digits
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ARS Routing Plan Time Table [330]
[In 12-hour Format]
[330]
ENTER
Plan Table No.
01–16
Day No.
0 Sun/1 Mon/2 Tue/
3 Wed/4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat
ARS Time No.
1 TimeA/2 TimeB/
3 TimeC/4 TimeD
Hour:Minute
01–12/00–59
SELECT
AM/PM
ENTER
END
END
END
END
[In 24-hour Format]
[330]
ENTER
Hour:Minute
00–23/00–59
Plan Table No.
01–16
Day No.
0 Sun/1 Mon/2 Tue/
3 Wed/4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat
ARS Time No.
1 TimeA/2 TimeB/
3 TimeC/4 TimeD
END
ENTER
338 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) [331–346]
[331–346]
ENTER
Day No.
0 Sun/1 Mon/2 Tue/
3 Wed/4 Thu/5 Fri/6 Sat
ARS Time No.
1 TimeA/2 TimeB/
3 TimeC/4 TimeD
Carrier Table No.
1–10/None
ENTER
END
ARS Carrier Name [350]
[350]
Carrier Table No.
01–10
ENTER
Name
Max. 20 characters
ENTER
Priority
1–6
END
ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access [351]
[351]
ENTER
Carrier Table No.
Trunk Group No.
01–10 01–64
Disable/
Enable
ENTER
END
ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access [352]
[352]
ENTER
Carrier Table No.
01–10
Digits to Remove
0–15
ENTER
END
ARS Carrier Access Code [353]
[353]
ENTER
Carrier Table No.
01–10
Carrier Access Code
Max. 32 digits
ENTER
END
Feature Guide 339
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.6
Trunk Programming
LCOT/BRI Trunk Connection [400]
[400]
ENTER deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–16
SELECT
(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)
No Connect/
Connect
ENTER
To the Desired Port No.
To the Next Port No.
END
(HOLD)
NEXT
CANCEL
LCOT/BRI Trunk Name [401]
[401]
Trunk No.
3 digits
ENTER
Name
Max. 20 characters
ENTER
END
LCOT/BRI Trunk Group Number [402]
[402]
Trunk No.
3 digits
ENTER
Trunk Group No.
01–64
LCOT/BRI Trunk Number Reference [409]
[409]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–16
Trunk No.
Reference only
ENTER
END
END
LCOT Dialling Mode [410]
[410]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–16
SELECT
DTMF/Pulse
ENTER
END
LCOT Pulse Rate [411]
[411]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–16
SELECT
Low/High
ENTER
END
340 Feature Guide
deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
3.3 PT Programming
LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration [412]
[412]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–16
SELECT
80/160 ms
ENTER
LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing [413]
[413]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–16
Mode No.
0: None/1: 6.5/
2–113: (N–1)×8 ms
ENTER
END
END
LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming [414]
[414]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–16
Mode No.
0: None/1: 6.5/
2–113: (N–1)×8 ms
ENTER
END
LCOT Reverse Circuit [415]
[415]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–16
SELECT
Disable/
Outgoing/Both Call
ENTER
END
LCOT Pause Time [416]
[416]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–16
SELECT
1.5/2.5/
3.5/4.5 s
LCOT Flash/Recall Time [417]
[417]
Slot No.
01–10
ENTER
Port No.
01–16
SELECT
None/80/96/112/
300/600/900/
1200 ms/option
ENTER
ENTER
END
END
LCOT Disconnect Time [418]
[418]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–16
SELECT
0.5/1.5/2.0/
4.0/12.0 s
ENTER
END
Feature Guide 341
3.3 PT Programming
deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
BRI Network Type [420]
[420]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–08
Network Type
00–56
BRI DIL/DDI/MSN Selection [421]
[421]
Slot No.
01–10
ENTER
Port No.
01–08
SELECT
DIL/DDI/MSN
ENTER
ENTER
END
END
BRI Subscriber Number [422]
[422]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–08
Subscriber No.
Max. 16 digits
ENTER
END
BRI Layer 1 Active Mode [424]
[424]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–08
SELECT
Permanent/
Call by call
ENTER
Note
This programme needs Slot Card Reset [902] to enable after setting.
BRI Layer 2 Active Mode [425]
[425]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–08
SELECT
Permanent/
Call by call
ENTER
Note
This programme needs Slot Card Reset [902] to enable after setting.
BRI Configuration [426]
[426]
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–08
SELECT
P-P/P-MP
ENTER ENTER
Note
This programme needs Slot Card Reset [902] to enable after setting.
END
END
END
342 Feature Guide
deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
BRI TEI Mode [427]
[427]
3.3 PT Programming
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–08
TEI
00–63 (for Fix)/
Clear (for Automatic)
ENTER
END
Note
This programme needs Slot Card Reset [902] to enable after setting.
DIL 1:1 Destination [450]
[450]
ENTER
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–24
Destination No.
1–4 digits
ENTER
END
DID Number [451]
[451]
ENTER
Location No.
0001–1000
DID No.
Max. 32 digits
ENTER
END
DID Name [452]
[452]
ENTER
Location No.
0001–1000
Name
Max. 20 characters
ENTER
END
DID Destination [453]
[453]
ENTER
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
Location No.
0001–1000
Destination No.
1–4 digits
ENTER
END
Trunk Group Intercept Destination [470]
[470]
ENTER
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
Trunk Group No.
01–64
Destination No.
Max. 32 digits
END
ENTER
Feature Guide 343
3.3 PT Programming
Host PBX Access Code [471]
[471]
Trunk Group No.
01–64
ENTER
Host PBX Access Code
Max.10 digits
ENTER
Location No.
01–10
END
Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration [472]
[472]
Trunk Group No.
01–64
ENTER
Time
01–60 min
ENTER
Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration [473]
[473]
Trunk Group No.
01–64
ENTER
Time
01–60 min
ENTER
END
END
DISA Silence Detection [475]
[475]
Trunk Group No.
01–64
ENTER
SELECT
No Detect/
Detect
DISA Continuous Signal Detection [476]
[476]
ENTER
Trunk Group No.
01–64
SELECT
No Detect/
Detect
ENTER
ENTER
END
END
DISA Cyclic Signal Detection [477]
[477]
Trunk Group No.
01–64
ENTER
SELECT
No Detect/
Detect
ENTER
END
Caller ID Signal Type [490] (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
[490]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
SELECT
FSK/FSK with
Visual Caller ID/DTMF
ENTER
344 Feature Guide deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
END
3.3 PT Programming
Pay Tone Signal Type [491] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
[491]
Slot No.
01–10
SELECT
12/16 kHz
END
ENTER ENTER
Feature Guide 345
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.7
COS Programming
Trunk Group Number [500]
[500]
ENTER
Trunk Group No.
01–64
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
COS No.
01–64
SELECT
(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)
Disable/Enable
To the Next
COS No.
To the Next
Trunk Group
No.
NEXT
Page up
ENTER
END
(HOLD)
TRS/Barring Level [501]
[501]
ENTER
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
COS No.
01–64
Level
1–7
ENTER
Trunk Call Duration Limitation [502]
[502]
ENTER
COS No.
01–64
SELECT
Disable/
Enable
Call Transfer to Trunk [503]
[503]
COS No.
01–64
ENTER
SELECT
Disable/
Enable
Call Forwarding to Trunk [504]
[504]
COS No.
01–64
ENTER
SELECT
Disable/
Enable
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
END
END
END
END
346 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Executive Busy Override [505]
[505]
COS No.
01–64
ENTER
SELECT
Disable/
Enable
ENTER
TRS/Barring Level for Extension Lock [510]
[510]
COS No.
01–64
ENTER
TRS/Barring Level
1–7
END
Executive Busy Override Deny [506]
[506]
ENTER
COS No.
01–64
SELECT
Disable/
Enable
DND Override [507]
[507]
ENTER
COS No.
01–64
SELECT
Disable/
Enable
ENTER
ENTER
END
END
Account Code Mode [508]
[508]
COS No.
01–64
ENTER
SELECT
Option/
Forced
ENTER
END
TRS/Barring Level for System Speed Dialling [509]
[509]
COS No.
01–64
ENTER
TRS/Barring Level
1–7
ENTER
ENTER
END
END
Manager Assignment [511]
[511]
COS No.
01–64
SELECT
Disable/Enable
ENTER ENTER
END
Feature Guide 347
3.3 PT Programming
Permission for Door Open Access [512]
[512]
ENTER
COS No.
01–64
SELECT
Disable/
Enable
ENTER
Programming Mode Limitation [516]
[516]
ENTER
COS No.
01–64
SELECT
Disable/Personal/
System&Personal
ENTER
END
Time Service Manual Switching [514]
[514]
ENTER
COS No.
01–64
SELECT
Disable/
Enable
ENTER
END
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone [515]
[515]
ENTER
COS No.
01–64
SELECT
Disable/
Enable
ENTER
END
END
348 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.8
Extension Programming
EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode [600]
deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
[600]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–10
Port No.
01–08
SELECT
(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)
Off/On
ENTER
To the Next Port No.
To the Desired Port No.
NEXT
CANCEL
Terminal Device Assignment [601]
[601]
Slot No.
01–10
ENTER
Port No.
01–16
SELECT
Telephone/Console 1–8/
Voice Mail 1–(1–12)/
Voice Mail 2–(1–12)/
PC Console 1–8
ENTER
END
(HOLD)
END
Class of Service [602]
[602]
ENTER
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
COS No.
01–64
ENTER
END
User Group [603]
[603]
ENTER
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
User Group No.
001–032
ENTER
END
Extension Intercept Destination [604]
[604]
ENTER
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
Call Forwarding—No Answer Time [605]
[605]
Time
0–120 s
ENTER
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
Destination No.
Max. 32 digits
ENTER
END
ENTER
END
Feature Guide 349
3.3 PT Programming
CLIP/COLP Number [606]
[606]
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
ENTER
CLIP/COLP No.
Max. 16 digits
ENTER
Incoming Call Distribution Group Member [620]
[620]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
Location No.
01–32
END
ENTER
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
END
Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing [621]
[621]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
Location No.
01–32
SELECT
Immediate/
1–6 (rings)/
No ring
END
ENTER
Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number [622]
[622]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
ENTER
END
Incoming Call Distribution Group Name [623]
[623]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
Name
Max. 20 characters
ENTER
Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method [624]
[624]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
SELECT
Ring/UCD/
Priority Hunt
ENTER
END
END
350 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Destination for Overflow Time Expiration [625]
[625]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
END
ENTER
Destination No.
Max. 32 digits
Overflow Time [626]
[626]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
Destination When All Busy [627]
[627]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
END
ENTER
Overflow Time
(1–125)×10 s
ENTER
END
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
Destination No.
Max. 32 digits
Queuing Call Capacity [628]
[628]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
Queuing Hurry-up Level [629]
[629]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
Number in Queuing
0–30
Hurry-up Level
None/1–30
ENTER
END
ENTER
END
Feature Guide 351
3.3 PT Programming
Queuing Time Table [630]
[630]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
END
ENTER
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
Table No.
None/01–64
Sequences in Queuing Time Table [631]
[631]
Table No.
01–64
ENTER
Location No.
01–16
SELECT
None/Overflow/
Disconnect/"N" × 5 s/
Sequence "N"/OGM "N"
* Number must be entered in the "N".
END
ENTER
Maximum Number of Agents [632]
[632]
ENTER
Incoming Call
Distribution
Group No.
01–64
Number of Agents
No Limitation/1–32
ENTER
END
User Groups of a Paging Group [640]
[640]
Paging Group No.
01–32
ENTER
User Group No.
001–032
SELECT
No/Yes
END
ENTER
External Pagers of a Paging Group [641]
[641]
Paging Group No.
01–32
External Pager No.
1–2
ENTER
SELECT
No/Yes
END
ENTER deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
352 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
User Groups of a Pickup Group [650]
[650]
Pickup Group No.
01–64
ENTER deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
ENTER
END
User Group No.
001–032
VM Group Floating Extension Number [660]
[660]
VM (DPT) Group No.
1–2
ENTER
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
SELECT
No/Yes
ENTER
END
Idle Extension Hunting Type [680]
[680]
ENTER
Hunting Group No.
01–64
SELECT
Circular/
Terminate
Idle Extension Hunting Group Member [681]
[681]
ENTER
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
Hunting Group No.
01–64
END
ENTER
Location No.
01–16
ENTER
END
Feature Guide 353
3.3 PT Programming
PS Registration [690]
[690]
ENTER
PS No.
001–128
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
ENTER
KX-TD7690
To the PS operation below
END deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
Push power button for 2 seconds.
Push F3 key for 2 seconds.
C.Tone
Note
Please refer to Installation Manual for the PS registration in detail.
With the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
For registering the DECT PS 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
For registering the 2.4 GHz PS 2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
With the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30:
For registering the DECT PS 6.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
For registering the 2.4 GHz PS 6.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
PS Termination [691]
[691]
ENTER
PS No.
001–128
ENTER
END deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration [692]
[692]
ENTER
PIN for PS Registration
1–4 digits
1234
ENTER
END
CS Status Reference [699]
[699]
Slot No.
01–11
ENTER
Port No.
01–08
CS Status
Reference only
END
354 Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.9
Resource/Interface Programming
External Pager Floating Extension Number [700]
[700]
deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
ENTER
Pager No.
1–2
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
To the Desired Pager No.
To the Next Pager No.
NEXT
CANCEL
ENTER
END
(HOLD)
Music Source Selection for BGM (with the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30)/
BGM2 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) [710]
[710]
ENTER
SELECT
(AUTO ANS/
MESSAGE)
External/Internal1/
Internal2
ENTER
END
Music on Hold [711]
[711]
ENTER
Music Source No.
Beep/BGM1–2
ENTER
END
Music for Transfer [712]
[712]
ENTER
SELECT
Hold Music/
Ring back
ENTER
END
Feature Guide 355
3.3 PT Programming
Doorphone Call Destination [720]
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[720]
ENTER
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
Destination No.
Max. 32 digits
[KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–11
END
[720]
ENTER
Time No.
1 Day/2 Lunch/
3 Break/4 Night
Card No. and Port No.
1–3 1–4
Slot No.
08–09
Port No.
1–4
Destination No.
Max. 32 digits
END
ENTER
Doorphone Number Reference [729]
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[729]
ENTER
[KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30]
Slot No.
01–11
Card No. and Port No.
1–3 1–4
Doorphone No.
Reference only
[729]
Port No.
1–4
ENTER
Slot No.
08–09
Doorphone No.
Reference only
END
END
Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730]
[730]
ENTER
Message No.
01–64
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
ENTER
END deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
356 Feature Guide
deleted:
[KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200]
[KX-TDA30] and its graphic
Outgoing Message (OGM) Name [731]
[731]
ENTER
Message No.
01–64
Name
Max. 20 characters
ENTER
DISA Security Mode [732]
[732]
ENTER
SELECT
None/
Trunk/All
ENTER
END
3.3 PT Programming
END
Feature Guide 357
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.10 SMDR & Maintenance Programming
RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code [800]
[800]
ENTER
Location
1
SELECT
(AUTO ANS/MESSAGE)
CR+LF/CR
ENTER
RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate [800]
[800]
Location
2
ENTER
SELECT
2400/4800/9600/
19200/38400/57600/
115200 bps
ENTER
RS-232C Parameter—Word Length [800]
[800]
Location
3
SELECT
7/8 bits
ENTER ENTER
RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit [800]
[800]
Location
4
ENTER
SELECT
None/Mark/
Space/Even/Odd
ENTER
RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length [800]
[800]
SELECT
1 bit/2 bits
ENTER
Location
5
ENTER
External Modem Control [801]
[801]
Command No.
1–5
ENTER
SMDR Page Length [802]
[802]
Page length
4–99 lines
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
END
END
END
(HOLD)
END
END
END
END
358 Feature Guide
SMDR Skip Perforation [803]
[803]
Skip Perforation
0–95 lines
ENTER
SMDR Outgoing Call Printing [804]
[804]
ENTER
SELECT
No print/Print
ENTER
ENTER
END
SMDR Incoming Call Printing [805]
[805]
ENTER
SELECT
No print/Print
ENTER
Remote Programming [810]
[810]
ENTER
SELECT
Disable/
Enable
ENTER
END
END
Modem Floating Extension Number [811]
[811]
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
ENTER ENTER
END
ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number [812]
[812]
Extn. No.
1–4 digits
END
ENTER ENTER
END
3.3 PT Programming
Feature Guide 359
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.11 Card Programming
Slot Card Type Reference [900]
[900]
Slot No.
01–11
ENTER
Card Name
Reference only
END
(HOLD)
Slot Card Deletion [901]
[901]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–11
Delete
Confirming the deleting operation.
To the Next Slot No.
To the Desired Slot No.
ENTER
END
NEXT
CANCEL
Slot Card Reset [902]
[902]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–11
Reset
Confirming the resetting operation.
ENTER
END
OPB3 Option Card Type Reference [910] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
[910]
ENTER
Slot No.
01–11
Card No.
1–3
Option Card Type
Reference only
END
OPB3 Option Card Deletion [911] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
[911]
Slot No.
01–11
END
ENTER
Card No.
1–3
Delete
Confirming the deleting operation.
ENTER
360 Feature Guide
Section 4
Appendix
Feature Guide 361
4.1 Capacity of System Resources
deleted: column for KX-TDA100
4.1
Capacity of System Resources
4.1.1
Capacity of System Resources
Category
System
Item KX-TDA15 KX-TDA30
Tenant
COS
Trunk Group
User Group
Paging Group
Call Pickup Group
Incoming Call
Distribution Group
PS Ring Group
VM (DPT) Group
VM (DTMF) Group
Queuing Time Table
Idle Extension Hunting
Group
Broadcasting Group
Absent Message—
System
Absent Message—
Extension
Message Waiting—PT
+ SLT
Message Waiting—PS
+ Incoming Call
Distribution Group
Number of Characters of Name
Extension Number
Digits
Extension Personal
Identification Number
(PIN)
Call Park Zone
Conference
8
64
64
32
32
64
64 (32 extensions/ group)
32
1 VPS 8 ch
2 groups 24 ch
64
64 (16 extensions/ group)
—
8 16 characters
1 16 characters/ extn.
256
256
20
1 – 4
10 digits/extn.
100
3 10 – 8 4
8
64
64
32
32
64
64 (32 extensions/ group)
32
1 VPS 8 ch
2 groups 24 ch
64
64 (16 extensions/ group)
8
8 16 characters extn.
256
256
20
1 – 4
10 digits/extn.
100
3 10 – 8 4
KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200
8
64
64
32
32
64
64 (32 extensions/ group)
32
2 VPSs 24 ch
2 groups 32 ch
64
64 (16 extensions/ group)
8
8 16 characters extn.
512
256
20
1 – 4
10 digits/extn.
100
3 10 – 8 4
362 Feature Guide
deleted: column for KX-TDA100
4.1 Capacity of System Resources
Category
System
Item
Verified Code
Verified Code
Personal Identification
Number (PIN)
KX-TDA15 KX-TDA30 KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200
4 digits, 1 000 entries 4 digits, 1 000 entries 4 digits, 1 000 entries
10 digits, 1 000 entries
10 digits, 1 000 entries
10 digits, 1 000 entries
Special Carrier Code 16 digits, 20 entries 16 digits, 20 entries 16 digits, 20 entries
Host PBX Access
Code
10 digits,
10 entries/trunk group
10 digits,
10 entries/trunk group
10 digits,
10 entries/trunk group
Dialling
ARS
DDI/DID Table 32 digits, 1 000 entries
200 calls
32 digits, 1 000 entries
200 calls
32 digits, 1 000 entries
200 calls SMDR
Emergency Call
Quick Dialling
System Speed Dialling
Personal Speed
Dialling
32 digits, 10 entries 32 digits, 10 entries 32 digits, 10 entries
4 digits, 80 entries 4 digits, 80 entries 4 digits, 80 entries
32 digits, 1 000 entries
32 digits,
10 entries/extn.
32 digits, 1 000 entries
32 digits,
10 entries/extn.
32 digits, 1 000 entries
32 digits,
10 entries/extn.
One-touch Dialling
Hot Line
Key Pad Protocol Dial
(ISDN Service
Access)
Redial
Routing Plan Table
Leading Number Table
32 digits
32 digits
32 digits
32 digits
16 entries
16 digits, 1 000 entries
32 digits
32 digits
32 digits
32 digits
16 entries
16 digits, 1 000 entries
32 digits
32 digits
32 digits
32 digits
16 entries
16 digits, 1 000 entries
Leading Number
Exception Table
ARS Carrier
Itemised Billing Code
Authorisation Code
Networking
TIE Line Routing and
Modification Table
Leading Number
PBX Code
16 digits, 200 entries 16 digits, 200 entries 16 digits, 200 entries
10
10 digits
10 digits
32 entries
3 digits
7 digits
10
10 digits
10 digits
32 entries
3 digits
7 digits
10
10 digits
10 digits
32 entries
3 digits
7 digits
Feature Guide 363
deleted: column for KX-TDA100
4.1 Capacity of System Resources
Category Item KX-TDA15
TRS/Barring TRS/Barring Level
TRS/Barring Denied
Code
Call Log
TRS/Barring
Exception Code
Outgoing Call Log—
PT
Outgoing Call Log—
PS
Incoming Call Log—
PT
Incoming Call Log—
PS
Password
Incoming Call Log—
Incoming Call
Distribution Group
System Password for
Installer
System Password for
Administrator—for PC
Programming
System Password for
User—for PC
Programming
System Password for
Administrator—for PT
Programming
System Password for
User—for PT
Programming
Manager Password
Programmer
Code
Installer Level
Programmer Code
Administrator Level
Programmer Code
User Level
Programmer Code
7
16 digits,
100 entries/level
16 digits,
100 entries/level
100 logs/extn.
5 52 logs/PBX
100 logs/extn.
5 28 logs/PBX
100 logs/extn.
10 52 logs/PBX
100 logs/extn.
10 28 logs/PBX
100 logs/group
10 64 logs/PBX
4 – 10 characters
4 – 10 characters
4 – 10 characters
4 – 10 digits
4 – 10 digits
4 – 10 digits
4 – 16 characters
4 – 16 characters
0 – 16 characters
KX-TDA30
7
16 digits,
100 entries/level
16 digits,
100 entries/level
100 logs/extn.
5 52 logs/PBX
100 logs/extn.
5 28 logs/PBX
100 logs/extn.
10 52 logs/PBX
100 logs/extn.
10 28 logs/PBX
100 logs/group
10 64 logs/PBX
KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200
7
16 digits,
100 entries/level
16 digits,
100 entries/level
100 logs/extn.
5 304 logs/PBX
100 logs/extn.
5 128 logs/PBX
100 logs/extn.
10 304 logs/PBX
100 logs/extn.
10 128 logs/PBX
100 logs/group
10 64 logs/PBX
4 – 10 characters
4 – 10 characters
4 – 10 characters
4 – 10 digits
4 – 10 digits
4 – 10 digits
4 – 16 characters
4 – 16 characters
0 – 16 characters
4 – 10 characters
4 – 10 characters
4 – 10 characters
4 – 10 digits
4 – 10 digits
4 – 10 digits
4 – 16 characters
4 – 16 characters
0 – 16 characters
364 Feature Guide
4.2
Tones/Ring Tones
4.2.1
Tones/Ring Tones
Tone Patterns (Default)
1 s
Confirmation Tone 1
Confirmation Tone 2
Confirmation Tone 3
Confirmation Tone 4
Confirmation Tone 5
Dial Tone 1
Dial Tone 2
Dial Tone 3
Dial Tone 4
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
Ringback Tone 1
Ringback Tone 2
DND Tone
Trunk Call Limit Warning
Tone
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide 365
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Tone Patterns (Default)
Hold Alarm Tone
Call Waiting Tone 1
1 s
Call Waiting Tone 2
Ring Tone Patterns (Default)
1 s
Single
Double
Triple
S-Double
15 s
OR
366 Feature Guide
4.3 List of Abbreviations
4.3
List of Abbreviations
4.3.1
List of Abbreviations
A
AA Automated Attendant
ANI Automatic Number Identification
AOC Advice of Charge
APT Analogue Proprietary Telephone
ARS Automatic Route Selection
E
EFA External Feature Access
F
FWD Call Forwarding
G
B
BGM Background Music
BRI Basic Rate Interface
C
CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber
CF Call Forwarding—by ISDN
CLI Calling Line Identification
CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation
CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction
CNIP Calling Name Identification Presentation
I
ICD Incoming Call Distribution
IRNA Intercept Routing—No Answer
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
L
LCS Live Call Screening
LED Light Emitting Diode
CNIR Calling Name Identification Restriction
COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation
COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction
CONP Connected Name Identification Presentation
M
MCID Malicious Call Identification
MSN Multiple Subscriber Number
CONR Connected Name Identification Restriction
COS Class of Service
CPC Calling Party Control
O
OHCA Off-hook Call Announcement
OPX Off Premise Extension
CT Call Transfer—by ISDN
CTI Computer Telephony Integration
P
D
DDI Direct Dialling In
DID Direct Inward Dialling
DIL Direct In Line
DISA Direct Inward System Access
DND Do Not Disturb
DPT Digital Proprietary Telephone
DSS Direct Station Selection
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
PIN Personal Identification Number
PRI Primary Rate Interface
PT Proprietary Telephone
S
SLT Single Line Telephone
SMDR Station Message Detail Recording
Feature Guide 367
4.3 List of Abbreviations
T
TAFAS Trunk Answer from Any Station
TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier
TRS/Barring Toll Restriction/Call Barring
U
UCD Uniform Call Distribution
V
VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol
VPN Virtual Private Network
VPS Voice Processing System
X
XDP eXtra Device Port
368 Feature Guide
4.4
Revision History
4.4.1
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Version 1.1
New Contents
• 1.5.4.2 Emergency Call
CLIP Number Notification
• 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial
Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button
• 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
System Speed Dialling Display by AUTO DIAL/STORE Button
• 1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone
Digital XDP
• 1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
• 1.20.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
• 1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
DID Number Notification to the VPS
Changed Contents
• 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
[How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates]
• 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
[Directed Call Pickup]
• 1.14.1 Paging
Paging Group
• 1.19.1 Fixed Buttons
FLASH/RECALL
• 1.19.3 LED Indication
Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp
Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button
• 1.24.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
Handover
4.4 Revision History
Feature Guide 369
4.4 Revision History
• 1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
CD (Condition Code)
• 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration
• 2.2.4 Time Service
Features Using Time Service
• 3.3.1 Programming Instructions
Entering Characters
• 3.3.4 Time Programming
Intercept Time [203]
DISA Intercept Time [211]
• 4.1.1 Capacity of System Resources
370 Feature Guide
4.4 Revision History
4.4.2
KX-TDA30 Version 1.1
New Contents
• 1.15 Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
• 1.20.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
• 1.23.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
DID Number Notification to the VPS
Changed Contents
• 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
[Directed Call Pickup]
• 1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone
Digital XDP
• 1.14.1 Paging
Paging Group
• 1.19.3 LED Indication
Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp
Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button
• 1.24.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
Handover
• 1.25.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
CD (Condition Code)
• 2.2.4 Time Service
Features Using Time Service
• 3.3.1 Programming Instructions
Entering Characters
• 3.3.4 Time Programming
Intercept Time [203]
DISA Intercept Time [211]
• 4.1.1 Capacity of System Resources
Feature Guide 371
4.4 Revision History
372 Feature Guide
Index
Feature Guide 373
Index
A
Absent Message 170
Absent Message [008] 330
Account Code Entry 75
Account Code Mode [508] 347
Administrative Information Output Features 230
Advice of Charge (AOC) 188
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice 72
Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override 69
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice 72
ANI —> Automatic Number Identification (ANI) 160
Answering Features 66
Answering Features—SUMMARY 66
AOC —> Advice of Charge (AOC) 188
Appendix 361
ARS Carrier Access Code [353] 339
ARS Carrier Name [350] 339
ARS Exception Number [325] 338
ARS Leading Number [321] 338
ARS Mode [320] 337
ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access [352] 339
ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) [331–346] 339
ARS Routing Plan Table Number [322] 338
ARS Routing Plan Time Table [330] 338
ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access [351] 339
ARS —> Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 113
Audible Tone Features 245
Authorisation Code 117
Automatic Call Hold 132
Automatic Call Park 134
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) 94
Automatic Extension Release 71
Automatic Log-out 55
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) 160
Automatic Privacy 140
Automatic Redial 90
Automatic Redial Interval [206] 335
Automatic Redial Repeat Times [205] 335
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 113
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features 113
Automatic Setup 303
Automatic Station Release —> Automatic Extension Release 71
B
Background Music (BGM) 150
Basic Programming 329
BGM —> Background Music (BGM) 150
BGM—External 150
Boss & Secretary feature 63
BRI Configuration [426] 342
BRI DIL/DDI/MSN Selection [421] 342
BRI Layer 1 Active Mode [424] 342
BRI Layer 2 Active Mode [425] 342
BRI Network Type [420] 342
BRI Subscriber Number [422] 342
BRI TEI Mode [427] 343
Broadcasting (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 143
Broadcasting Features (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
143
Broadcasting Group 143
Budget Management 107
Built-in Small Call Centre Features 4
Busy Line/Busy Party Features 94
Busy on Busy 53
Busy Station Signalling (BSS) —> Call Waiting 38
Buttons and Functions 324
C
Call Directory—Extension Dialling 72
Call Directory—Speed Dialling 91
Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT [208] 336
Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) 189
Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) 191
Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG 272
Call Forwarding (FWD) 61
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 58
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 58
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY 58
Call Forwarding to Trunk [504] 346
Call Forwarding—No Answer Time [605] 349
Call Handling Features 15
Call Hold 132
Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN 193
Call Hold Retrieve Deny 132
Call Monitor 96
Call Park 134
Call Park Recall 134
Call Park Retrieve Deny 134
Call Pickup 68
Call Splitting 135
Call Transfer 130
Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN 194
Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG 274
Call Transfer to Trunk [503] 346
Call Transfer with Announcement 130
Call Transfer without Announcement 130
Call Transfer—Screened —> Call Transfer with Announcement 130
Call Transfer—Unscreened —> Call Transfer without Announcement
130
Call Waiting 38
Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID) 38
Call Waiting Tone 99
Caller ID 160
Caller ID Features 160
Caller ID Signal Type [490] (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 344
Caller ID to SLT Port 160
Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution 27
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) 160
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 129
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
186
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and
Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/
CONP)—by QSIG 270
Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR) 187
Capacity of System Resources 362
Card Programming 360
374 Feature Guide
Index
CCBS —> Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) 197
CCBS —> Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by
QSIG 276
CF —> Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) 189
CF —> Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) 191
CF —> Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG 272
Charge Margin [010] 331
Charge Meter 236
Charge Rate per Unit [012] 331
Charge Tax [011] 331
Circular Hunting 40
Class of Service (COS) 283
Class of Service [602] 349
CLI —> Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution 27
CLIP —> Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) 160
CLIP —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation
(CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG 270
CLIP/COLP Number [606] 350
CLIR —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/
COLR) 187, 271
CNIP —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation
(CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG 270
CNIR —> Calling/Connected Name Identification Restriction (CNIR/
CONR) 271
COLP —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP) 186
COLP —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation
(CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG 270
COLR —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/
COLR) 187, 271
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) 197
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG 276
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 278
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Features 4, 278
Conference 138
Conference Call 143
Conference Features 137
Conference Features—SUMMARY 137
Confirmation Tone 246
CONP —> Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation
(CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG 270
CONR —> Calling/Connected Name Identification Restriction (CNIR/
CONR) 271
Console Paired Telephone [007] 330
Consultation Hold 95, 96, 124, 135, 227
Conversation Features 118
COS Programming 346
COS —> Class of Service (COS) 283
CPC —> Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 129
CS Status Reference [699] 354
CT —> Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN 194
CT —> Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG 274
CTI —> Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 278
Currency [131] 334
D
Data Line Security 122
Date & Time [000] 329
DDI —> Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 21
Decimal Point Position for Currency [130] 334
Delayed Ringing 46
Denied Code Tables 102
Destination for Overflow Time Expiration [625] 351
Destination When All Busy [627] 351
Dial Tone 245
Dial Tone Transfer 109
Dial Type Selection 76
Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation 125
DID Destination [453] 343
DID Name [452] 343
DID Number [451] 343
DID —> Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 21
Digital XDP 126
DIL 1:1 Destination [450] 343
DIL —> Direct In Line (DIL) 19
Direct In Line (DIL) 19
Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 21
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 153
Direct One-touch Answering 66
Direct Trunk Access 84
Directed Call Pickup 68
DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number (DISA AA Service) 153
DISA Continuous Signal Detection [476] 344
DISA Cyclic Signal Detection [477] 344
DISA Delayed Answer Time [209] 336
DISA Intercept Routing—Busy/DND 154
DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer 155
DISA Intercept Time [211] 336
DISA Intercept—No Dial 153
DISA Security Mode [732] 357
DISA Security Mode and Available Features 153
DISA Silence Detection [475] 344
DISA Trunk-to-Trunk Call Prolong Time [210] 336
DISA —> Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 153
Display Information 180
DND Override 65
DND Override [507] 347
DND —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 58
Do Not Disturb (DND) 65
Door Open 148
Door Open Duration Time [207] 335
Doorphone Call 146
Doorphone Call Destination [720] 356
Doorphone Number Reference [729] 356
E
E1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 201
E1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 201
EFA —> External Feature Access (EFA) 124
Electronic Station Lockout —> Extension Lock 108
Emergency Call 74
Emergency Number [304] 337
Entering Characters 326
Entering System Programming Mode 325
Feature Guide 375
Index
Exception Code Tables 102
Exclusive Call Hold 132
Executive Busy Override 95
Executive Busy Override [505] 347
Executive Busy Override Deny 95
Executive Busy Override Deny [506] 347
Extension Controlling Features 239
Extension Feature Clear 241
Extension Intercept Destination [604] 349
Extension Lock 108
Extension Name [004] 330
Extension Number [003] 329
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) 239
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) [005] 330
Extension PIN Lock 239
Extension Port Configuration 282
Extension Programming 349
Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration 125
Extension-to-Trunk Call Duration [472] 344
External Feature Access (EFA) 124
External Modem Control [801] 358
External Pager Floating Extension Number [700] 355
External Pagers of a Paging Group [641] 352
EXtra Device Port (XDP) 282
EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode [600] 349
F
Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 312
Feature Guide References 2
Feature Highlights 4
Fixed Buttons 171
Flash/Recall/Terminate 123
Flexible Buttons 174
Flexible Numbering [100] 332
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering 305
Floating Extension 310
Floating Station —> Floating Extension 310
Full One-touch Dialling 88
FWD —> Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 58
FWD—All Calls 61
FWD—Busy 61
FWD—Busy/No Answer 61
FWD—Follow Me 61
FWD—No Answer 61
G
Group 284
Group Call Distribution 46
Group Call Pickup 68
H
Handover 220
Handset/Headset Selection —> Headset Operation 121
Hands-free Answerback 69
Hands-free Operation 118
Headset Operation 121
Hold Recall 132
Hold Recall Time [200] 335
Holding Features 132
376 Feature Guide
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 79
Host PBX Access Code [471] 344
Hot Line 93
Hot Line Waiting Time [204] 335
Hurry-up Transfer —> Manual Queue Redirection 50
I
Idle Extension Hunting 40
Idle Extension Hunting Group Member [681] 353
Idle Extension Hunting Type [680] 353
Idle Line Access (Local Access) 84
Idle Line Access (Local Access) [103] 333
Idle Line Preference 83
Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing [621] 350
Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method [624] 350
Incoming Call Distribution Group Features 42
Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY 42
Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number [622]
350
Incoming Call Distribution Group Member [620] 350
Incoming Call Distribution Group Name [623] 350
Incoming Call Features 16
Incoming Call Indication Features 36
Incoming Call Indication Features—SUMMARY 36
Incoming Call Log 165
Incoming Call Log Display Lock 166
Incoming Call Queue Monitor 56
Incoming Trunk Call Features 16
Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 16
Installation Manual References 2
Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console 319
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 182
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features 182
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY 182
Intercept Routing 29
Intercept Routing—Busy/DND 29
Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) 29
Intercept Routing—No Destination 32
Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group
52
Intercept Time [203] 335
Intercom Call 72
Internal Call Block 34
Internal Call Features 33
Internal Call Features—SUMMARY 33
Interrupt Redial 90
Introduction 318
IRNA —> Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) 29
ISDN Centrex Service 184
ISDN Extension 198
ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number [812] 359
ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol 200
ISDN —> Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 182
Itemised Billing Code 117
K
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Version 1.1
369
KX-TDA30 Version 1.1
371
Index
L
Last Number Redial 90
LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming [414] 341
LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing [413] 341
LCOT Dialling Mode [410] 340
LCOT Disconnect Time [418] 341
LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration [412] 341
LCOT Flash/Recall Time [417] 341
LCOT Pause Time [416] 341
LCOT Pulse Rate [411] 340
LCOT Reverse Circuit [415] 341
LCOT/BRI Trunk Connection [400] 340
LCOT/BRI Trunk Group Number [402] 340
LCOT/BRI Trunk Name [401] 340
LCOT/BRI Trunk Number Reference [409] 340
LCS —> Live Call Screening (LCS) 217
LED Indication 177
Line Preference Override 83
Line Preference—Incoming 67
Line Preference—Outgoing 83
List of Abbreviations 367
Live Call Screening (LCS) 217
Local Alarm Information 315
Log-in/Log-out 54
Log-in/Log-out Monitor 55
M
Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference [190] 334
Making Call Features 70
Malicious Call Identification (MCID) 196
Manager Assignment [511] 347
Manager Features 295
Manager Password [112] 333
Manual Queue Redirection 50
Maximum Number of Agents [632] 352
MCID —> Malicious Call Identification (MCID) 196
Memory Dialling Features 86
Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY 86
Message Features 167
Message Waiting 167
Modem Floating Extension Number [811] 359
MSN —> Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 24
Multiple FWD 63
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 24
Music for Transfer [712] 355
Music on Hold 136
Music on Hold [711] 355
Music Source Selection for BGM (with the KX-TDA15/KX-TDA30)/BGM2
(with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) [710] 355
Mute 120
N
Networking Features 4, 247
No Line Preference 67, 83
O
Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 100
Off-hook Monitor 119
OGM —> Outgoing Message (OGM) 151
OHCA —> Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 100
One-touch Dialling 88
One-touch Transfer 131
OPB3 Option Card Deletion [911] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
360
OPB3 Option Card Type Reference [910] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 360
Operator Assignment [006] 330
Operator Call 294
Operator Features 294
Optional Device Features 146
Outgoing Call Log 90
Outgoing Message (OGM) 151
Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number [730] 356
Outgoing Message (OGM) Name [731] 357
Overflow Feature 52
Overflow Time [626] 351
P
Paging 141
Paging Deny 141
Paging DND 65, 142
Paging Features 141
Paging Group 141
Parallelled Telephone 126
Parallelled Telephone Features 5
Password Security 318
Pause Insertion 78
Pay Tone Signal Type [491] (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 345
PC Phone/PC Console Features 5
PC Programming 297, 319
Permission for Door Open Access [512] 348
Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration [692] 354
Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock 91
Pickup Dialling —> Hot Line 93
PIN —> Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) 239
PIN —> Verified Code Personal Identification Number (PIN) 111
Portable Station (PS) Connection 220
Portable Station (PS) Features 5, 220
Power Failure Connections 312
Power Failure Restart 314
Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
312
Predialling 70
Prime Line Preference 67, 83
Priority Hunting 46
Privacy Release 140
Programming Instructions 317, 324
Programming Mode Limitation [516] 348
Programming Structure 325
Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 171
PS Directory 225
PS Feature Buttons 226
PS Registration [690] 354
PS Ring Group 222
PS Termination [691] 354
PS —> Portable Station (PS) Features 220
PT Programming 300, 324
Feature Guide 377
Index
PT —> Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 171
Pulse to Tone Conversion 76
Q
QSIG Network 268
QSIG Network—SUMMARY 268
Queuing Call Capacity [628] 351
Queuing Feature 49
Queuing Hurry-up Level [629] 351
Queuing Time Table [630] 352
Quick Dialling 92
Quick Setup 302
R
Receiving Group Features 40
Remote Control 56
Remote Extension Control by User 244
Remote Extension Lock 108
Remote Programming [810] 359
Remote Station Control by User —> Remote Extension Control by
User 244
Remote Station Lock Control —> Remote Extension Lock 108
Required Telephone/Extension 324
Resource/Interface Programming 355
Reverse Circuit 77
Revision History 369
Ring 46
Ring Tone Pattern Selection 37
Ringing Line Preference 67
RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate [800] 358
RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code [800] 358
RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit [800] 358
RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length [800] 358
RS-232C Parameter—Word Length [800] 358
S
S-CO Line Access 84
Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 97
Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY 97
Seizing a Line Features 82
Seizing a Line Features—SUMMARY 82
Sequences in Queuing Time Table [631] 352
Slot Card Deletion [901] 360
Slot Card Reset [902] 360
Slot Card Type Reference [900] 360
SMDR & Maintenance Programming 358
SMDR Incoming Call Printing [805] 359
SMDR Outgoing Call Printing [804] 359
SMDR Page Length [802] 358
SMDR Skip Perforation [803] 359
SMDR —> Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 230
Software Upgrading 311
Special Carrier Access Code 81
Special Carrier Access Code [303] 337
Speed Dialling—Personal/System 91
Station Hunting —> Idle Extension Hunting 40
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 230
Station Password Lock —> Extension PIN Lock 239
Station Programme Clear —> Extension Feature Clear 241
378 Feature Guide
Station Speed Dialling —> Personal Speed Dialling 91
Subaddressing 198
Subaddressing (SUB) 183
Supervisory Feature 56
System Configuration and Administration Features 281
System Configuration—Hardware 282
System Configuration—Software 283
System Data Control 297
System Password for Administrator—for PT Programming [110] 333
System Password for User—for PT Programming [111] 333
System Programming 332
System Requirements 319
System Speed Dialling Name [002] 329
System Speed Dialling Number [001] 329
T
T1 Line Service (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 203
T1 Line Service Features (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) 203
TAFAS —> Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) 149
Tenant Service 287
Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block 288
Terminal Device Assignment [601] 349
Terminated Hunting 40
Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN 195
TIE Line Service 247
Time Programming 335
Time Service 290
Time Service Manual Switching [514] 348
Time Service Starting Time [102] 332
Time Service Switching Mode [101] 332
Timed Reminder 243
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 102
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Features 102
Tones/Ring Tones 365
Transfer Recall 130
Transfer Recall Time [201] 335
Transferring Features 130
TRS/Barring Denied Code [301] 337
TRS/Barring Exception Code [302] 337
TRS/Barring Level 103
TRS/Barring Level [501] 346
TRS/Barring Level for Extension Lock [510] 347
TRS/Barring Level for System Speed Dialling [509] 347
TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 102
TRS/Barring Override by System Speed Dialling [300] 337
TRS/Barring —> Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
Features 102
TRS/Barring/ARS Programming 337
Trunk Access 84
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) 149
Trunk Call Duration Limitation [502] 346
Trunk Call Features 73
Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 73
Trunk Call Limitation 125
Trunk Group Access 84
Trunk Group Intercept Destination [470] 343
Trunk Group Number [500] 346
Trunk Programming 340
Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration 125
Trunk-to-Trunk Call Duration [473] 344
Two-way Recording into the VPS 218
U
UCD —> Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 46
Unattended Conference 138
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 46
User Group [603] 349
User Groups of a Paging Group [640] 352
User Groups of a Pickup Group [650] 353
User Manual References 2
User-to-user Signalling Type 1 (UUS-1) 183
V
Verified Code [120] 333
Verified Code COS Number [123] 334
Verified Code Entry 111
Verified Code Name [121] 333
Verified Code Personal Identification Number (PIN) 111
Verified Code Personal Identification Number (PIN) [122] 333
VIP Call 51
Virtual Private Network (VPN) 266
VM Group Floating Extension Number [660] 353
VM —> Voice Mail Features 205
Voice Mail (VM) Group 205
Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 215
Voice Mail DTMF Integration 208
Voice Mail Features 4, 205
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 277
VoIP —> Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 277
VPN —> Virtual Private Network (VPN) 266
VPS Data Control by the PBX 218
W
Walking COS 110
Walking Extension 242
Walking Station —> Walking Extension 242
Whisper OHCA 101
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 227
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone [515] 348
Wrap-up 54
X
XDP —> EXtra Device Port (XDP) 282
Index
Feature Guide 379
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Copyright:
This manual is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. (PCC).
You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model. Except above, you may not reproduce this manual in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of PCC.
2003 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
PSQX2634VA
KK0203CM5074
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project